Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Lvped208006en (Web)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 220

Low Voltage

Direct Current Network


Catalogue│2014

Compact NSX
Masterpact NW
DC - DC PV
Power circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
direct current from 16 to 4000 A

220E0000.indd 1 25/11/2013 15:52:29


220E0000.indd 2 25/11/2013 15:52:29
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW
direct current

A complete DC offer
from 16 to 4000 A
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW direct current (DC) circuit breakers are used to
protect and control low-voltage distribution systems.

They are installed in main low-voltage switchboards (MLVS) and in distribution


switchboards (as incomers and outgoers). They can use all the accessories and
auxiliaries for the AC ranges and are thus suitable for most DC systems and
applications.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:54:16


A complete DC offer
Compact NSX DC from 16 to 630 A

0
V X63 )
0 NS 550 A
/ 75 V X40
0 (
36
kA 750 NS 400A)
k A/ V
500
0
100
F 5 (
/ V X2 )
4P S 36
kA 500 0V
NS 250 A
3P/ 5 kA
/
/ 50
0
X16 )
(
F 8 A NS 160 A
M 0k 0V
10 / 25
0 (
2P V X10 )
S 6k
A 250 NS 100 A
3 k A/ 0V (
F 50 / 25
N 5 kA
8
1P M

The Compact NSX range is designed for DC voltages from 24 to 750 V and offers:
b a wide selection of models suited to many applications:
v 1, 2, 3 and 4 poles up to 160 A
v 3 and 4 poles from 250 to 630 A
b high breaking capacities, with four performance levels F, N, M and S:
vF
- 36 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V
- 36 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems y 500 V
- 36 kA in a 3 or 4 poles version, for systems y 750 V
vN
- 50 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V
vM
- 85 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V
- 85 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems y 500 V
vS
- 100 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems y 500 V
- 100 kA in a 3 or 4 poles version, for systems y 750 V
b fewer frame sizes: just two poles pitches (35 and 45 mm) for easy integration in
installation systems (enclosures, machines, etc.)
b accessories for insulation and series or parallel connection of poles, suited to the
particularities of DC applications
b fixed and withdrawable versions (3 and 4 poles, DC type).
Breaking capacity Icu for 250 V per pole and L/R = 15 ms (1)
(1P: 250 V, 2P: 500 V, 3P: 750 V)
(1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system (see page A-7).

NSX160 DC -1P. NSX160 DC - 2P. NSX250 DC - 3P. NSX630 DC - 3P.

II

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:54:18


from 16 to 4000 A
Masterpact NW DC from 1000 to 4000 A

40 A)
V NW 4000
0 (
/ 90
0
2 A)
kA 0V NW 2000
35 A / 75 0V 0 (
0k
1 A )
H 5 / 50 NW 1000
5k
A 0V
/ 50
H (
8 A
H 3 5k
N

The Masterpact NW range is designed for DC voltages from 24 to 900 V and offers:
b 2 versions : C/D (3 poles)
E (4 poles)
b three current ratings: 1000, 2000 and 4000 A
b two high breaking-capacity levels N and H.
Breaking capacity Icu for L/R = 15 ms (1) for 500, 750 or 900 V system voltages:
vN
- 35 kA for systems y 500 V
vH
- 85 kA for systems y 500 V
- 50 kA for systems y 750 V
- 35 kA for systems y 900 V
b two models:
v circuit breaker for the protection of power circuits and loads
v switch-disconnector for circuit control and disconnection
b fixed and drawout versions for the entire range.
(1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system (see page A-7).

NW10 DC - C/D Version. NW10 DC - E Version.

III

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:54:18


IV

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:54:23


Compact NSX DC PV and
Masterpact NW DC PV
A complete DC offer
for solar application
from 80 to 4000 A

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:54:26


Compact NSX DC PV
circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

Ensuring the reliability and


the efficiency of your photovoltaic
installation
Schneider Electric photovoltaic packages give you dependable, clean, and affordable solar power. High
quality, highly efficient, and available everywhere, our systems are safe, simple-to-install, giving you a
competitive edge. The Compact NSX DC PV range of molded case circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
with operational voltage up to 1000 V DC includes the switchgears and the protection components you need
to guarantee the safety and operation efficiency of your photovoltaic installation in commercial buildings and
power plants.

With heatsinks supplied as standard, the circuit breaker or


switch-disconnector rating is optimized, avoiding the need
to oversize protection components and saving space in the
enclosure. As part of the Compact NSX range, all existing
auxiliaries and accessories are compatible.
The terminal shields and phase barriers are available for
insulation. The shunt trip auxiliary is available for remote
disconnection.

VI

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:54:27


Optimising the management of your electrical
installation
Schneider Electric’s Compact NSX DC PV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are used to control a circuit and
achieve isolation.
With the COM option, they can be integrated into an energy management system, which provides information on:
• the state of the device (O/C)
• remote Opening/Closing control
• number of operations.

@
Firewall

bus
Mod

Ethernet (TPC / IP/ Internet


Modbus)
FDM
ULP
BCM

Module BCM ULP


iRIO RTU /
EGX300

Modbus

Modbus IFM
interface

EGX300 gateway-server or iRIO RTU


The EGX300 web-enabled gateway-server or the iRIO RTU
(remote terminal unit) can both be used as Ethernet coupler
for the PowerLogic System devices and for any other
communicating devices operating under Modbus RS485
FDM switchboard protocol. Data is viewable via a standard web browser.
display unit

Compact NSX630b Compact NSX100 to 630


to 1600

PowerLogic ION Enterprise


PowerLogic ION Enterprise software is a complete power
management solution for your facility or plant operations.
It can be connected to Masterpact through Ethernet/
Modbus protocol.

VII

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:54:30


Masterpact NW HADCD-PV
switch-disconnectors

Schneider Electric’s Masterpact NW HADCD-PV switch-disconnectors are used for circuit control and disconnection.

Safer photovoltaic energy generation

VIII

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:54:31


Compact NSX DC - DC PV General contents
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2

Functions
A-1
and characteristics

Installation
B-1
recommendations

Dimensions and
C-1
connection

Electrical diagrams D-1

Additional
E-1
characteristics

Catalogue numbers
F-1
and order form

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:54:31


Presentation The benefits of a comprehensive
and optimised range design…

Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV A wide, complete and high-performance range


circuit breakers constitute a flexible and cost- Schneider Electric DC - DC PV circuit breakers and switches provide a
effective means to meet the various needs of DC comprehensive solution for the many applications met in DC systems.
systems. The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC ranges offer, a wide selection of current
ratings (16 to 4000 A) and breaking capacities (up to 100 kA) for the common
voltages up to 900 V DC.
DB403581.eps

DB416526.eps

The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV ranges are designed for use
under 1000 V for photovoltaic application.

Flexible and optimised design


The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC ranges use all the standard accessories
and auxiliaries of the AC ranges.
The modular design and many possibilities offered by these systems provide a high
degree of flexibility in customizing products, while benefiting from dependable and
optimised industrial design.

Safe and simple operation


Even though they use the accessories of the corresponding AC ranges,
the Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC ranges have been specially designed for
DC systems.
Specific accessories have been developed to meet the needs of series or parallel
connection of poles by users in a simple and dependable manner (see page
opposite).
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC devices can be installed in class II
switchboards with a degree of protection up to IP54.
NSX250 DC rating plate. NSX200 DC PV rating plate.
Compliance with standards
Schneider Electric DC circuit breaker ranges comply with:
b the main international standards and in particular IEC 60947-1/2/3
b European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national
DB416527.eps

standards: France NF, Germany VDE, UK BS, Australia AS, Italy CEI
Compact b the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd’s Register
of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)
NSX1250 NA DC PV b French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO
organisation for the protection of machine tools. For United States UL, Canadian
Ui 1000 V Uimp 8 kV CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please consult us.
Ue (max) 1000V Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV switches and auxiliaries comply with
Icw 20kA/1s the following:
b the main international standards and in particular IEC 60947-2 (circuit breaker),
Icm 20kA
IEC 60947-3 (switch-disconnectors)
Ie 40°C 1250A
bb European (EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2 and EN 60947-3) and the corresponding
DC22B national standards: France NF, Germany VDE, United Kingdom BS, Australia AS,
Italy CEI.

Open communication
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC devices can be equipped with
communication options for integration in a supervision system via Modbus/JBus bus.
IEC / EN 60947-3 Pollution degree
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers are certified for operation
NSX1250 NA DC PV rating plate.
under pollution conditions in industrial environments, as per standard IEC 60947,
corresponding to:
b pollution degree 3 (Compact NSX)
b pollution degree 4 (Masterpact NW).

Tropicalisation
DB104462.eps

DB416572.eps

Masterpact
NW20 HADCD-PV
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers have successfully passed
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV the tests prescribed by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series
Icw 85kA/1s b IEC 60068-2-1 - dry cold (-40 °C)
Icm 85kA b IEC 60068-2-1 - dry heat (+85 °C)
b IEC 60068-2-30 - damp heat (95 % relative humidity at +55 °C)
b IEC 68-2-52 (level 2) - salt mist.
IEC 60947-3

Environmental protection
Ith 2000A 55°C
Schneider Electric circuit breaker ranges benefit from Eco-design:
Ue (V) Ie (A) b use of materials not representing a danger to the environment
DC22A 1000 2000 b non-polluting production units complying with ISO 14001 standards
b filtered breaking for high current ratings to avoid pollution in the switchboard
b low dissipated energy per pole, making energy losses insignificant
NW20 HDC-D rating plate. NW20 HADCD-PV rating
b marking of products in view of sorting recyclable materials at the end of the service
plate.
life.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:54:32


… specifically for DC - DC PV
applications

Compact NSX DC and Masterpact NW DC Designed for direct current


circuit breakers offer optimised pole-connection
possibilities. Performance levels and quality signed Schneider Electric
The creation of a dependable and high-performance DC range requires a large
amount of specific design and development work in addition to that invested in the
original AC range.
Schneider Electric called on its proven industrial experience in the AC field and its
recognised know-how in current interruption to develop a high-performance DC
range.
Schneider Electric decided to use the cases and accessories of its Compact NSX
and Masterpact NW ranges with:
b a high-performance design for the breaking chambers or the poles intended
specifically for DC applications (e.g. 100 kA at 250 V per pole for Compact NSX
and 85 kA at 900 V for two poles for Masterpact NW)
b fast trip units developed for DC applications
b optimised pole-connection and isolation possibilities that are both simple and
dependable.

Optimised solutions for the many types of DC systems


The many types of DC systems make it necessary, for cost and technical-
optimisation reasons, to connect the poles of two, three or four-pole circuit breakers
in series or in parallel.
b The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW ranges enable series connection of poles,
thereby optimising breaking capacity for high voltages.
Series connection reduces the voltage across the terminals of each pole (the total
voltage is divided by two, three or four depending on the circuit breaker) and the
operation of all poles provides the breaking capacity of the overall device.
This makes it possible to break short-circuit currents at high voltages while optimising
solutions (e.g. a Compact NSX 100 kA 250 V per pole can be used on a 750 V
system with three poles connected in series, thus reducing the cost compared to a
750 V solution).
b The Compact NSX range enables parallel connection of the poles, thereby
optimising the use of the rated currents.

Optimised and dependable series or parallel


DB402604.eps

connection of poles
Series connection - controlled temperature rise and
guaranteed performance
Schneider Electric DC circuit breakers comply with product standards
IEC 60947-1 and 2.
To that end, series connection of poles meets:
b temperature-rise conditions. Connections specifically designed to dissipate heat
mean the thermal model is equivalent to that for AC applications. The devices
dissipate the temperature rise produced by relatively short series connections
b optimum safety conditions. Connections are designed for extreme operating
conditions (insulation and safety clearances, ultimate breaking capacity, high
Compact NSX DC - safety and flexibility. pollution levels, etc.).

Parallel connection - optimisation


Certain DC systems require high power levels (hundreds to thousands of amperes)
DB402605.eps

at reduced voltages, most often y 250 V.


The configurations of DC systems and the exceptional performance levels of
Compact NSX circuit breakers mean the poles can be parallel connected.
This technique virtually doubles, triples or quadruples the current rating depending
on the type of circuit breaker and thus reduces the cost of solutions.

Masterpact NW DC - supplied ready for installation


(here with vertical rear connections).

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:54:33


Presentation Great flexibility in adapting
to DC applications
Overview of series connection of poles
for Compact NSX DC
With Compact NSX DC circuit breakers, it is easy to Compact NSX DC
create a large number of series pole arrangements
using prefabricated connections mounted on site Examples of series connection
during equipment installation. Two-pole devices

DB403286.eps

DB402976.eps

DB403287.eps

DB402977.eps
DB104468.eps

One type of connection per framesize, two Three-pole devices


catalogue numbers for all series connections.
DB403288.eps

DB402606.eps

DB403289.eps

DB402978.eps
Four-pole devices
DB403290.eps

DB402979.eps

DB403291.eps

DB402980.eps

b All connections are possible for the fixed and Great flexibility for connections
withdrawable versions.
DB104475.eps

DB402981.eps

b Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to


right or right to left.
b Indifferent connection of upstream and
downstream cables to top or bottom terminals.
b Series connection of poles is possible by
upstream/downstream connections. Creation of the
connections is the responsibility of the panel builder
or the installer.

All connections are possible for the fixed and Indifferent connection of polarities.
withdrawable versions.
DB402982.eps

DB402606.eps

Upstream/downstream connections to top or Series connection of poles is possible by upstream/


bottom connectors. downstream connections (user made).

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:54:40


Overview of series connection of poles
for Masterpact NW DC
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers, with high Masterpact NW DC
ratings and installed as incoming devices, offer
three coupling versions C, D and E ready for Three versions supplied ready for connection
connection. Version C
The polarities “Line -”, “Line +” indicated on the rear

DB402988.eps

DB402252_55.eps
connections of the Masterpact NW DC
circuit breakers have to be respected in order to
ensure the magnetic threshold tolerances.

Front view: three-pole case - two poles in Rear view.


series.

The safe prefabricated series connections are Version D

DB402264_55.eps
DB402989.eps

factory made due to the power ratings. They also


dissipate heat.
DB104484.eps

Front view: three-pole case - three poles in Rear view with connections.
series.

Version E
DB402990.eps

DB402276_55.eps

Front view: four-pole case - four poles in Rear view with connections.
series.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:54:42


Presentation Great flexibility in adapting
to DC applications
Parallel connection of poles

The exceptional performance levels Examples of parallel connection


of Compact NSX DC and DC PV circuit breakers Two-pole devices
mean the poles can be parallel connected. This

DB403292.eps

DB402984.eps
technique virtually doubles, triples or quadruples
the current rating depending on the type of
circuit breaker and thus reduces the cost of
solutions.
DB104485.eps

Parallel pole connection accessories are identical to


those for series connections. The are equipped with Three-pole devices
DB403293.eps

heat sinks.

DB402985.eps
Customer connections are made directly
to the connection plates after removing the heat
sinks.
DB104486.eps

Specific connections are required for parallel


connection of three poles.
Four-pole devices (2 x 2 poles in parallel)
DB403294.eps

DB402986.eps

It is possible to mix series and parallel connections


DB403295.eps

DB402987.eps

Note: creation of the additional connection (1) is the responsibility of the panel builder or the
installer.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:54:45


Great flexibility in adapting
to DC PV applications
Overview of series connectors
for NSX DC PV
Compact NSX TM DC PV Compact NSX NA DC PV
2 Series connections
DB416077.eps

DB416273.eps
with heatsinks
2 Series connections
(dissipators)
with heatsinks
(dissipators)

4 interphase
barriers or
terminal shields

2 terminal shields

F1-

F1+
F1-
F2-
Photovoltaic panels

F1+
F2+
F2-
F3- Photovoltaic panels

F2+
F3+
F3-

F3+

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:54:47


TOOLS

Ecodial

Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation


calculation in accordance with the IEC60364
international standard or national standards.

This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",


offers a new ergonomic and new features:
ppoperating mode that allows easy calculation in case
of installation with different type of sources
(parallel transformers, back-up generators…)
ppdiscrimination analysis associating curves checking
and discrimination tables
ppdirect access to protection settings including residual
current protections
ppeasy selection of alternate solutions or manual
selection of a product.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:54:48


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Functions and characteristics
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2
Selection guide for DC circuit breakers
Types of DC distribution systems A-2
Solutions depending on the distribution system and the voltage A-3
Examples of circuit breaker selection A-5
Calculation of DC distribution-system characteristics
Short-circuit currents L/R time constant A-7
General characteristics of Compact NSX DC and DC PV
Operating conditions A-8
Compact NSX DC and DC PV A-9
Circuit breaker characteristics
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC A-10
Trip-unit characteristics
Types of trip units - Trip units for Compact NSX DC A-12
Accessories and auxiliaries
Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC fixed version A-14
Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC plug-in and withdrawable versions A-16
Electrical and mechanical accessories
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC A-18
Connection of fixed devices A-20
Connection of electrical auxiliaries A-22
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX100/160/250 DC A-24
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX400/630 DC A-26
Indication contacts for Compact NSX DC A-27
Rotary handles A-28
Motor mechanism A-30
Remote tripping A-31
Locks A-32
Sealing accessories A-33
Escutcheons and protection collars A-34
Circuit breaker characteristics
Compact NSX80 TM DC PV to NSX500 TM DC PV A-36
Switch-disconnectors characteristics
Compact NSX100 NA DC PV to NSX500 NA DC PV A-38
Compact NSX630b NA DC PV to NSX1600 NA DC PV A-40
Accessories and auxiliaries
Overview of Compact NSX80 TM to NSX500 TM DC PV circuit breakers A-42
Overview of Compact NSX100 NA to NSX500 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors A-43
Overview of Compact NSX630b NA to NSX1600 NA DC PV
switch-disconnectors A-44
General characteristics of Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Operating conditions A-46
Masterpact NW DC and DC PV A-47
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC A-48
Trip-unit characteristics
Trip units for Masterpact NW DC A-50
Switch-disconnectors for PV application
Masterpact NW HADCD-PV A-52
Connections and safety clearances A-53
Communication
COM option in Masterpact NW DC A-54
Overview of functions A-55
Masterpact NW communication
Networks and sofware A-56
RCU utilities A-58
Supervision software A-59
Panorama of electrical and mechanical accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC A-60
Installation recommendations B-1 Connection
Dimensions and connection C-1
Overview of solutions A-62
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1 Electrical and mechanical accessories
Catalogue numbers and order form F-1 Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC A-64
A-1

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:54:48


Functions
and characteristics
Selection guide for DC
circuit breakers
Types of DC distribution systems

There are three types of DC distribution systems (see Selection of a circuit breaker depends essentially on the distribution-system
the table). parameters presented below which are used to determine the corresponding
The operational voltage in conjunction with one of the characteristics:
three systems determines the number of poles taking b type of system - determines the type of product and the number of poles
part in current interruption. connected in series for each polarity
b rated voltage - determines the number of series poles taking part in current
interruption
b nominal current - determines the rated current of the circuit-breaker
b maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation - determines the breaking
capacity.
Types of systems
Earthed systems Isolated systems
The source has one earthed polarity (1) The source has an earthed mid-point
Diagrams and different faults
DB116982.eps

DB116983.eps

DB116984.eps
Fault analysis (neglecting resistance of earth electrodes)
Fault A b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U/2 b no consequences
b only protected polarity concerned b only positive polarity concerned b the fault must be indicated by an IMD
b all poles of protected polarity must have b all poles of positive polarity must have (insulation-monitoring device) and cleared
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2 (standard IEC/EN 60364)
Fault B b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U
b if only one polarity (the positive here) is b both polarities are concerned b both polarities are concerned
protected, all poles of protected polarity must b all poles of the two polarities must have b all poles of the two polarities must have
have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b if both polarities are protected, to enable
disconnection, all poles of the two polarities
must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
Fault C No consequences b same as fault A b same as fault A with the same obligations
b all poles of the
negative polarity must have breaking capacity
u Isc max. at U/2
Double fault Double fault not possible, Double fault not possible, b maximum Isc at U
A and D or C and system trips on first fault system trips on first fault b only positive polarity (cases A and D) or
E negative (C and E) concerned
b all poles of each polarity must have breaking
capacity u Isc max. at U
Most unfavourable cases
Fault A and fault B (if only one polarity is Fault B Double fault A and D or C and E
protected)
Conclusion: selection of number of poles and breaking capacity
Layout of protection poles
b on only one polarity (1) b identical for each polarity b identical for each polarity
Number of series poles
Per polarity b all on same polarity b equal b equal
Total b 1, 2 or 3 without disconnection b 2 or 4 (2) b 2 or 4 (2)
b 2, 3 or 4 with disconnection
Breaking capacity
b all poles of the protected polarity u Isc max. b all poles of both polarities u Isc max. at U b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U
at U b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U/2
Disconnection of both polarities (3)
Possible by adding a pole to the non-protected b ensured b ensured
polarity
Implementation
See the selection table opposite
(1) Positive or negative, depending on the polarity connected to the exposed conductive parts.
(2) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.
(3) Disconnection made possible by multi-pole breaking.

A-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:54:49


Solutions depending on the distribution
system and the voltage
Series connection of poles
Type of distribution system
Type Earthed Isolated
Source One polarity (negative here) connected to earth Mid-point connected to earth Isolated polarities
(or exposed conductive parts)
Protected polarities 1 (disconnection of 1P) 2 (disconnection of 2P) 2 2
Diagrams

DB116985.eps

DB116986.eps

DB116987.eps

DB116988.eps
(and types of faults)

Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection


Compact NSX DC
24 V y Un y 250 V

DB115851.eps

DB115851.eps
DB115850.eps

DB115851.eps
Single-pole. Two-pole (1). Two-pole (1). Two-pole (1).
250 V < Un y 500 V
DB115852.eps

DB115853.eps

DB115851.eps

DB115854.eps
Two-pole (1). Three-pole. Two-pole (1). Four-pole.
500 V < Un y 750 V
DB115855.eps

DB115854.eps
DB115856.eps

Three-pole. Four-pole. Four-pole.


Masterpact NW DC
Type N
24 V y Un y 500 V
DB115857.eps

DB115857.eps

DB115857.eps

Version C. Version C. Version C.


Type H
24 V y Un y 500 V
DB403137.eps

DB115857.eps

DB115859.eps

Version D. Version C. Version E.


500 V < Un y 750 V
DB403137.eps

DB115859.eps

DB115859.eps

Version D. Version E. Version E.


750 V < Un y 900 V
DB403137.eps

DB115859.eps

DB115859.eps

Version D. Version E. Version E.


(1) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.

A-3

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:54:51


Functions
and characteristics
Selection guide for DC
circuit breakers
Solutions depending on the distribution
system and the voltage
Parallel connection of poles
Type of distribution system
Type Earthed Isolated
Source One polarity (negative here) connected to earth Mid-point connected to earth Isolated polarities
(or exposed conductive parts)
Protected polarities 1 (disconnection of 1P) 2 (disconnection of 2P) 2 2
Diagrams

DB116985.eps

DB116986.eps

DB116987.eps

DB116988.eps
(and types of faults)

Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection


Compact NSX DC
Un y 250 V
DB115860.eps

DB115861.eps

DB115861.eps
DB115861.eps

Two, three-pole, 2, 3P in Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.


parallel, four-pole, 4P in parallel.
250 V < Un y 500 V
DB115862.eps

DB115861.eps

Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel, Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.


connected in series.
Breaking capacity of parallel solutions
Un y 250 V 250 V < Un y 500 V
Version N H DC N H DC
Two-pole 2 poles in parallel 85 100 - - - -
Three-pole 3 poles in parallel - - 100 - - -
Four-pole 4 poles in parallel - - 100 - - -
2 x 2 poles in parallel, connected in series - - 100 - - 100

Comparison of series and parallel connection in terms of performance


Series connection of poles divides the voltage per pole Series connection of poles on a DC circuit breaker is the means to:
and optimises breaking capacity for high-voltage b divide the system voltage by the number of poles
systems. b use the rated current for each pole
b use the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker for all the poles.
For example, a Compact NSX630, 3P DC type, with the three poles connected in
series, provides:
b a maximum voltage of 750 V (250 V per pole)
b a rated current of 630 A
b a breaking capacity of 100 kA / 750 V.
Consequently, a 630 A / 250 V device can be used in a 750 V system.

Parallel connection of poles divides the current per Parallel connection of poles, on the contrary, imposes the system voltage on
pole and optimises the rated current for systems that each pole, but is the means to:
do not exceed the withstand voltage of each pole. b divide the current flowing through each pole by the number of poles
The maximum useable rating and the value of the b increase the rated current.
magnetic setting are indicated (see page B-7). For example, the same Compact NSX630 DC 3P circuit breaker with three poles in
parallel provides:
b a maximum voltage of 250 V (250 V per pole)
b a rated current of 1500 A (see table page B-7)
b a breaking capacity of 100 kA / 250 V.
Consequently, a 630 A device used in a 250 V system can handle 1500 A.

A-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:54:52


Examples of circuit breaker selection

Selection of a Compact NSX DC


Example 1
Isc b Type of system - mid-point connected to earth
DB117186.eps

b System voltage - Un = 500 V DC with time constant L/R = 5 ms


b Rated current required at point of installation In = 250 A
b Short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 60 kA
Selection constraints - (see page A-2)
The system with the mid-point connected to earth requires (see conclusion
page A-2):
b identical protection-pole layout for each polarity
b an equal number of poles for each polarity, i.e. a total of two or four
DB115867.eps

DB115868.eps

b all poles of the two polarities must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
i.e. 60 kA/500 V in this case
b all poles of the each polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un/2,
i.e. 60 kA/250 V in this case.
Selection possibilities - (see pages A-3 and A-4)
The tables indicate for 250 V < Un y 500 V and for this system:
b poles connected in series: two-pole 2P in series V selection 1
b poles connected in parallel: four-pole 2 x 2P parallel connected in series
V selection 2.
Circuit breaker selection - (see pages A-10 and B-7)
b selection 1: the 250 A rated current does not exist in 2P. It is possible to use a
Selection 1. Selection 2: Compact NSX160 DC 4P 250 A 3P DC type circuit breaker with the central pole not connected V selection 3
2 x 2P parallel mounted in series. b selection 2: the 160 A rated current (DC version) is suitable with a 2 x 2P
assembly connected in parallel because (see table page B-7):
v the rated current of the 2 x 2P assembly connected in parallel is In = 288 A > 250 A
DB115869.eps

v and for L/R = 5 ms:


- breaking capacity of all poles = 100 kA/750 V > 60 kA/500 V
- breaking capacity of poles of each polarity = 100 kA/250 V > 60 kA/250 V.
The options are:
b selection 1: Compact NSX250S DC, 3P, 2 poles connected
b selection 3: Compact NSX160 DC, 4P, 2 x 2P parallel connected in series.
Both solutions exist in fixed and withdrawable configurations.
Trip-unit selection
Selection 3: Compact NSX250 DC 3P with 2P connected. b Compact NSX250 DC 3P: the selection table (see page A-12) indicates
3 TM250DC trip units, which are interchangeable
b Compact NSX160 DC, 4P (2 x 2P) 160 A: the selection table (see page B-7)
indicates, for the 2 x 2P parallel configuration mounted in series and for 250 A, a
TM125DC trip unit with the magnetic-protection threshold set to 2500 A.

Example 2
b Type of system - one polarity earthed
DB115870.eps

b System voltage - Un = 250 V DC with time constant L/R = 5 ms


b Rated current required at point of installation In = 160 A
b short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 45 kA.
Selection constraints - (see page A-2)
The system with one polarity connected to earth requires (see conclusion
page A-2):
b protection poles on the protected polarity
b all poles contribute to breaking for the polarity:
DB115871.eps

DB115872.eps

v 1, 2 or 3P without disconnection of the two polarities


v 2, 3 or 4P with disconnection of the two polarities
b all poles of the protected polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
i.e. 45 kA/250 V in this case.
Selection possibilities - (see pages A-3 and A-4)
The tables indicate for 250 V < Un y 250 V and for this system:
b poles connected in series: single-pole V selection 1 (or two-pole with
disconnection V selection 2)
b poles connected in parallel: two-pole V selection 3
Selection 1: Compact NSX160N DC 1P. Selection 2. b other selections (parallel connection) are possible, but are of no particular interest.
Circuit breaker selection - (see pages A-10 and B-7)
DB115873.eps

b selection 1: Compact NSX160N DC, 1P, 50 kA, available in fixed version


(or selection 2: Compact NSX160N DC, 2P, 85 kA, if disconnection of the two
polarities is desired)
b selection 3: Compact NSX100N DC, 2P in parallel, 50 kA, providing a rated
current of 200 A (see table page B-7), available in fixed version.
Trip-unit selection
b Compact NSX160N DC, 1P: the selection table (see page A-12) indicates a
built-in TM160DC trip unit with the magnetic-protection threshold set to 1250 A
b Compact NSX100N DC, 2P in parallel: the selection table (see page B-7)
indicates, for the 2P parallel configuration and for 160 A, a TM80D trip unit with the
magnetic-protection threshold set to 1600 A.
Selection 3: Compact NSX100N 2P DC in parallel.

A-5

220E2050.indd 5 27/11/2013 15:33:20


Functions Selection guide for DC
and characteristics
circuit breakers
Examples of circuit breaker selection

Selection of a Masterpact NW DC
Example 1
b
DB115870.eps

Type of system - isolated polarities


b System voltage - Un = 750 V DC with time constant L/R = 30 ms
b Rated current required at point of installation In = 2000 A
b Short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 40 kA
Selection constraints - (see page A-2)
The system with isolated polarities requires (see conclusion page A-2):
b identical protection for each polarity
b an equal number of poles for each polarity, i.e. a total of two or four
b all poles of each polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
DB403116.eps

i.e. 40 kA/750 V in this case.


Selection possibilities - (see page A-3)
The table for series poles indicates for a voltage 24 V < Un y 750 V and the type of
system, use of a four-pole, version E circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker selection - (see page A-48)
The Masterpact NW DC characteristics table indicates more specifically with a
2000 A a NW20 DC type H circuit breaker with a breaking capacity of 50 kA/750 V
(L/R = 30 ms).
The correct selection is a Masterpact NW20 DC type H version E, 2000 A, 50 kA,
available in fixed and drawout versions.
Masterpact NW20H DC version E.

Example 2
b
DB115870.eps

Type of system - one polarity earthed


b System voltage - Un = 500 V DC with time constant L/R = 15 ms
b Rated current required at point of installation In = 1000 A
b Short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 30 kA
Selection constraints - (see page A-2)
The system with one polarity connected to earth requires
(see conclusion page A-2):
b protection poles on the protected polarity
b all poles contribute to breaking for the polarity:
DB115875.eps

v 1, 2 or 3P without disconnection of the two polarities


v 2, 3 or 4P with disconnection of the two polarities
b all poles of the protected polarity must have breaking capacity
u Isc max. at Un, i.e. 30 kA/500 V in this case.
Selection possibilities - (see page A-3)
The table for series poles indicates for a voltage 24 V < Un y 500 V and the type of
system, use of a three-pole, version C circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker selection - (see page A-48)
The Masterpact NW DC characteristics table indicates more specifically with a
1000 A a NW10 DC type N circuit breaker with a breaking capacity of 35 kA/500 V
Masterpact NW10N DC version C. (L/R = 15 ms). The correct selection is a Masterpact NW10 DC type N version C,
1000 A, 35 kA, available in fixed and drawout versions.

A-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:54:54


Calculation of DC distribution-
system characteristics
Short-circuit currents L/R time constant

Short-circuit currents
Calculation of the short-circuit current across the terminals of
DB403117.eps

a battery
During a short-circuit, the battery discharges a current equal to :
Vb
Isc =
Ri
b Vb = maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged)
b Ri = internal resistance equivalent to all cells (a function of the capacity in
ampere-hours).

Example
b Consider a set of four 500 Ah batteries connected in parallel.
b Discharge voltage of one battery: 240 V (110 cells 2.2 V each).
b Discharge current of one battery: 300 A with a run-time of 30 minutes.
b Discharge current of all four batteries: 1200 A with a run-time of 30 minutes.
b Internal resistance 0.5 mW per cell, i.e. for one battery:
Ri = 110 x 0.5 x 10-3 = 55 x 10-3 W.
b Short-circuit current of one battery: Isc = 240 V / 55 x 10-3 W = 4.37 kA.
b Neglecting the resistance of the connections, for all four batteries discharging the
short-circuit current in parallel, the total short-circuit current is four times that of one
battery, i.e. Isc = 4 x 4.37 kA = 17.5 kA.
Note: if the internal resistance is not known, it is possible to use the following rough
approximation: Isc = kc where c is the capacity of the battery in ampere-hours and k is a
coefficient close to 10 and always less than 20.

Other typical examples


b PABXs: Isc from 5 to 25 kA at 240 V DC with L/R = 5 ms.
b Submarine: Isc from 40 to 60 kA at 400 V DC with L/R = 5 ms.

L/R time constant


When a short-circuit occurs across the terminals of a DC circuit, the current rises
DB403118.eps

from the load current (y In) to the short-circuit current Isc over a period of time that
depends on the value of the resistance R and inductance L of the short-circuited
loop.
The equation determining the current in the loop is:
U = Ri + L Di/Dt
The curve of I versus time is defined (neglecting In) by the equation:
I= Isc (1 - exp(t/t))
where t = L/R is the time constant for the rise to Isc.
DB403119.eps

Practically speaking, after a time t = 3t, the short-circuit is considered to be


established, because the value of exp(-3) = 0.05 is negligible compared to 1 (see the
curve opposite).
The lower the time constant (e.g. battery circuit), the shorter the time required for the
current to rise to Isc.

To express breaking capacity, the interrupted short-circuit current with the following
time constants is used:
b L/R = 5 ms, fast short-circuit
b L/R = 15 ms, standardised value used in standard IEC 60947-2
b L/R = 30 ms, slow short-circuit.
In general, the value of the system time constant is calculated under worst-case
conditions, across the terminals of the generator.

Breaking-capacity values for:


b Compact NSX DC (table page A-10) are the same for 5 ms and 15 ms
b Masterpact NW DC (table page A-48) are indicated for 3 values, 5 ms, 15 ms
and 30 ms.

A-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:54:55


Functions General characteristics of
and characteristics
Compact NSX DC and DC PV
Operating conditions

(m)
Altitude
DB111389.eps

2000
Compact NSX circuit breakers are designed to operate at their rated values at
altitudes under 2000 metres.
Above 2000 metres, the changes in the characteristics of the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) result in a reduction of the characteristics below.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Compact NSX DC
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 7.1 6.4 5.6
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 750 710 635 560
Maximum rated NSX DC y 250 V 250 220 200 175
operationnal NSX DC 250 V to 500 V 500 440 400 350
DC voltage NSX DC 500 V to 750 V 750 660 600 525
Rated current (A) 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Compact NSX DC PV
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 7.1 6.4 5.6
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 1000 900 800 700
Maximum rated operationnal DC voltage 1000 900 800 700
Rated current (A) 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In

Vibrations
Compact NSX circuit breakers are guaranteed against electromagnetic or
mechanical vibrations.
DB111390.eps

Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels required
by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.):
b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm
b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.

Electromagnetic compatibility
Compact NSX circuit breakers are protected against:
DB111391.eps

b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances


b overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) and devices emitting radio waves (radios,
walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
b electrostatic discharges produced by users. The circuit breakers have
successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by
international standard IEC 60947-2, appendix F.
The above tests guarantee that:
v no nuisance tripping occurs
v tripping times are respected.
Compact NSX circuit breakers comply with the following electromagnetic-
compatibility standards:
b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 - electrostatic immunity discharge test, part 2 (circuit breakers)
b IEC/EN 61000-4-3 - electromagnetic-field immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-4 - electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-5 - surge immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-6 - immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by
radiofrequency fields
b CISPR 11 - radio-frequency conducted and radiated emission tests required for
CE marking:
v EN 61000-6-2 - immunity standard for industrial environments
v EN 50081-1-2 - emissions in commercial and industrial environments.

Ambient temperature
Operating-temperature range
b Compact NSX circuit breakers and switches may be used between
-25 °C and +70 °C.
bb For temperatures higher than 40 °C (65 °C for circuit breakers used to protect
motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.
b Circuit breakers and switches should be put into service under the normal,
ambient operating temperatures indicated above. Exceptionally, they may be put
into service when the ambient temperature is between -35 °C and -25 °C.
Derating
Above 40 °C, it is necessary to take into account the derating values.
Storage-temperature range
b Compact NSX circuit breakers and switches may be stored in their original
packing between -50 °C and +85 °C.

A-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:54:58


Compact NSX DC and DC PV

Installation in class II switchboards


All Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are class II front-face devices. They may be
installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per standard IEC 60664)
without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special
operations even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor
mechanism.

Degree of protection
Compact NSX DC circuit breakers offer the following protection characteristics
depending on the installation conditions:
b IP: degree of protection (standard IEC 60529)
b IK: protection against external mechanical impacts (standard EN 50102).

Compact NSX DC
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
With toggle IP3X IK07
DB402607.eps

With direct rotary handle, IP3X IK07


DB402608.eps

standard or VDE

Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard


With toggle IP40 IK07
DB402609.eps

With direct rotary handle, IP40 IK07


DB402610.eps

standard or VDE
CCM IP43 IK07
CNOMO IP54 IK07

With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08


DB402611.eps

With motor mechanism IP40 IK07


DB402612.eps

Ø5...8
DB403582.eps

Positive contact indication


Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined
by IEC 60947-1 and 60947-2:
b the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
b the operating handle and the indicators cannot indicate the OFF position unless
the contacts are effectively open
b padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:
b the mechanical reliability of the position-indication system
b the absence of leakage currents
b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
DB116888.eps

For Compact NSX DC, installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does
not alter the reliability of the position-indication system.

A-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:55:00


Functions Circuit breaker characteristics
and characteristics
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC

Compact NSX DC circuit breaker


PB108201.eps

Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1/ 60947-2 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-2
Rated current at 40 °C In (A)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV peak)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC)
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) V DC 48-125 V (1P) (1)
(L/R = 5 ms and L/R = 15 ms) 250 V (1P) (1)
500 V (2P) (1)
750 V (3P) (1)
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
PB108202.eps

Rated making capacity Icm % Icu


Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree (as per IEC 60664-1)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page A-13)
Trip units Built-in
Interchangeable
Protection Overloads
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical
PB107547_32.eps

Electrical 250 V In
250 V In/2
500 V In
500 V In/2
750 V In
750 V In/2
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts
Voltage release MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation and connections
Fixed Front connection
Rear connection
PB105035_31r.eps

Plug-in (base) Front connection


Rear connection
Withdrawable (chassis) Front connection
Rear connection
Control Manual with toggle
with direct or extended rotary handle
Electrical with remote control
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions Fixed (mm) 1P
H x W x D (mm) connected in series 2P
3P
4P
Weight (kg) Fixed (kg) 1P
connected in series 2P
3P
4P
(1) Number of poles taking part in current interruption.
Example. The NSX100N DC circuit breaker exists in the following versions:
- 1 pole with an Icu of 50 kA, for systems y 250 V
- 2 poles with an Icu of 85 kA, for systems y 500 V; 1 pole can be used in a 250 V system.

A-10

220EN_Catalogue.indb 10 25/11/2013 14:55:02


NSX100 DC NSX160 DC NSX250 DC NSX400 DC NSX630 DC
1 2 3/4 1 2 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4

100 160 250 400 550


750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
250 500 750 250 500 750 750 750 750
F N M F M S F S F N M F M S F S F S F S F S
36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
- - - 36 85 100 36 100 - - - - 85 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
- - - - - - 36 100 - - - - - - 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
100 %
100 %
A
< 10 ms
b
3

b b b b b b - b b b b b b - - b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b - -
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b - - -
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

10000 5000
5000 1000
10000 2000
5000 1000
10000 2000
5000 1000
10000 2000

b
b
b

b
b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b b b
b
b
b

161 x 35 x 86 - - 161 x 35 x 86 - - -
- 161 x 70 x 86 - - 161 x 70 x 86 - -
- - 161 x 105 x 86 - - 161 x 105 x 86 255 x 140 x 110
- - 161 x 140 x 86 - - 161 x 140 x 86 225 x 185 x 110
0.7 - - 0.7 - - -
- 1.2 - - 1.2 - -
- - 1.6 to 1.9 - - 1.6 to 1.9 6.0
- - 2.1 to 2.3 - - 2.1 to 2.3 7.8

A-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:55:03


Functions Trip-unit characteristics
and characteristics Types of trip units
Trip units for Compact NSX DC

Depending on the version, Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are equipped with:
pb107518_13_r.eps

b 1P/2P: TM-D built-in thermal-magnetic trip units.


Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC
Single-pole and two-pole (built-in trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-D
Rating In (A) at 40 °C 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Compact circuit NSX100N/H DC b b b b b b b b b - -
breaker NSX160N/H DC - - - - - - - - - b b
Overload protection (thermal)
Tripping threshold Ir (A) at 40 °C Fixed
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up Im (A) Fixed
Compact circuit NSX100/ Marked AC value (1) 190 190 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250
breaker 160N/H DC True DC value
pb107524-19_r.eps

260 260 400 400 700 700 700 800 1000 1200 1250
Depending on the version, Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are equipped with:
b 3P/4P:
v up to 250 A, TM-D, TM-DC or TM-G interchangeable thermal-magnetic trip units
v for 400 and 630 A, MP1, MP2, MP3 built-in magnetic trip units.
Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC - NSX250 DC
Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-D TM-DC
Rating (A) In (A) at 40 °C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Compact NSX100 DC b b b b b b b b - - - -
circuit NSX160 DC b b b b b b b b b b - -
breaker b b b b b b
NSX250 DC - - - - - -
Overload protection (thermal)
Tripping Ir (at 40 °C) Adjustable
PB107547_32.eps

threshold (A) 0.7 to 1 x In


Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up (A) Im Fixed Adjustable
Compact NSX100/160/ Marked AC 190 300 400 500 500 500 - - - - - -
circuit NSX250 DC value (1)
breaker True DC value 260 400 550 700 700 700 800 800 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In

Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC - NSX250 DC


Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-G
Rating (A) In (A) at 40 °C 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Compact NSX100 DC b b b b b b
circuit NSX160 DC - b b b b b b b
breaker b b b
NSX250 DC - - - -
Overload protection (thermal)
PB105035_31r.eps

Tripping Ir (at 40 °C) Adjustable


threshold (A) 0.7 to 1 x In
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up (A) Im Fixed
Compact Marked AC NSX100 DC 63 80 80 125 200 320 - - - -
circuit value (1) NSX160 DC - 80 80 125 200 320 440 440 - -
breaker
NSX250 DC - - - - 200 320 440 - 440 520
True DC value NSX100 DC 80 100 100 150 250 400 530 530 530 625
NSX160 DC - 100 100 150 250 400 530 530 - -
NSX250 DC - - - - - - - - 530 625
(1) The pick-up values for single-pole and two-pole, TMD and TMG magnetic trip units up to 63 A are marked with AC values.
A correction coefficient is required to obtain the DC pick-up values indicated on the next line.
The magnetic-protection pick-up values for TM-DC trip units are indicated directly in DC values.

Compact NSX400 DC - NSX630 DC trip units


Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-3d (built-in trip units)
Type of trip unit MP1 MP2 MP3
Circuit breaker Compact NSX400 DC b b -
Compact NSX630 DC b b b
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up (A) Im Adjustable - -
800…1600 1250…2500 2000…4000
Above 250 A, the protection of Compact NSX400 DC and 630 DC circuit breakers is
ensured by built-in magnetic trip units supplied mounted on the circuit breaker and
offering one of three protection levels MP1, MP2 and MP3.
A-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:55:04


Types of trip units

DB416264.eps

DC DC

see page A-12 see page A-50


see page B-7
(parallel connection of poles)

Trip units for Compact NSX DC


DB402616.eps

TM thermal-magnetic trip unit up to 250 A


DB112046.eps

1 overload protection threshold. Up to 250 A for Compact NSX DC, protection is provided by thermal-magnetic trip
2 short-circuit protection pick-up.
units.
For 1 or 2 poles, trip units are built in
b TM-D up to 160 A: fixed thermal threshold and magnetic pick-up
For 3 or 4 poles, trip units are interchangeable
b TM-D up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fixed magnetic pick-up
b TM-DC from 80 to 250 A: fixed or adjustable (for 200 and 250 A) magnetic pick-up
and adjustable thermal threshold
b TM-G, up to 250 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fixed low magnetic pick-up to
protect long cables.
MP magnetic trip unit for 400 and 630 A
DB402615.eps

Above 250 A, the protection of Compact NSX400 DC and 630 DC circuit breaker is
ensured by built-in magnetic trip unit, offering one of three protection levels MP1,
MP2 or MP3.

A-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:55:05


Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
fixed version

Insulation accessories

DB416262.eps

Interphase barriers

Electrical auxiliaries A-27

Sealable terminal
shields
Indication contact

Heat sink Voltage release

Protection and measurements

TM-D, TM-G trip unit

A-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:55:20


Connection A-20

One-piece spreader

Cable connectors

Rear connectors

Cable connectors

Communication
(1) (1)

Terminal
extensions
BSCM module

NSX cord

(1)

Modbus interface

Control accessories A-28

Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle

Motor mechanism

(1) Compact NSX100-250 only.

A-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:55:23


Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
plug-in and withdrawable versions

Insulation accessories

DB414015.eps
Interphase barriers

Electrical accessories A-22

Sealable long terminal


shields for plug-in base

Heat sink

Automatic withdrawable auxiliary connector

Manual auxiliary connector

Mechanical accessories A-19

Circuit-breaker side plate

Chassis side plate

A-16

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:55:27


Connection A-20

Cable connectors Rear connectors

Lugs

Rear connectors

Adapter

Cable connectors

Circuit breaker

Terminal extensions

Plug-in base

Power connection
accessories

Power connections

A-17

220EN_Catalogue.indb 17 25/11/2013 14:55:28


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC

Compact NSX DC circuit breakers may be installed Fixed circuit breakers


horizontally, vertically or flat on their back, without Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard connection using bars or cables
derating performance levels. with lugs. Bare-cable connectors are available for connection to bare copper or
There are three installation versions: aluminium cables.
b fixed For connection of large cables, a number of solutions with spreaders may be used
b plug-in (on a base) for both cables with lugs or bare cables.
b withdrawable (on a chassis).

DB112200.eps

DB112201.eps

DB112202.eps
For the last two, components must be added (base,
chassis) to the fixed version.
Many connection components are shared by the three
versions.

Mounting on a backplate. Mounting on rails. Mounting on DIN rail


PB107547_32.eps

(with adapter).
DB112203.eps

DB112204.eps
L3
L2
L1

8 Nm

L2
8 Nm

L3
8 Nm
DB112208.eps

L3
L2
L1

Mounting on a Prisma mounting plate. Mounting on busbars with an


Fixed Compact NSX250 DC. Installation positions. adapter.

Plug-in base circuit breakers


PB104934.eps

The plug-in version makes it possible to:


bb extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch the
connections on the base
bb allow for the addition of future circuits by installing bases that will be equipped with
a circuit breaker at a later date
bb isolate the power circuits when the device is mounted on or through a panel. It acts
as a barrier for the connections of the plug-in base. Insulation is made complete by
the mandatory short terminal shields on the device. The degrees of protection are:
vv circuit breaker plugged in = IP4
vv circuit breaker removed = IP2
DB112209.eps

vv circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4.


Parts of a plug-in configuration
A plug-in configuration is made by adding a "plug-in kit" to a fixed device.
Plug-in Installation positions. To avoid connecting or disconnecting the power circuits under load conditions, a
Compact NSX250 DC. safety trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or
withdrawing it. The safety trip, supplied with the kit, must be installed on the device. If
the device is disconnected, the safety trip does not operate. The device can be
operated outside the switchboard.
Accessories
Optional insulation accessories are available.
bb Terminal shields to protect against direct contact.
bb Interphase barriers to reinforce insulation between phases and protect against
direct contact.
Mounting
DB112206.eps

DB112205.eps

DB112207.eps

Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front Mounting on rails.


panel.

A-18

220EN_Catalogue.indb 18 25/11/2013 14:55:31


bb Disconnected position - the power circuits are Withdrawable circuit breakers
disconnected, but the circuit breaker is still on the In addition to the advantages provided by the base, installation on a chassis
chassis and may still be operated (ON, OFF, facilitates handling. It offers three positions, with transfer from one to the other after
push-to-trip). mechanical unlocking:
bb The circuit breaker may be locked using bb connected: the power circuits are connected
1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to bb disconnected: the power circuits are disconnected, the device can be operated to
prevent connection. check auxiliary operation
bb The auxiliaries can be tested (with manual auxiliary bb removed: the device is free and can be removed from the chassis.
connector).
Parts of a withdrawable configuration
A withdrawable configuration requires two side plates installed on the base and two
PB104935.eps

sides plates mounted on the circuit breaker. Similar to the plug-in version, a safety
trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it,
and enables device operation in the disconnected position.
Accessories
Accessories are the same as for the base, with in addition:
bb auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the “connected” and
“disconnected” positions
bb locking by 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to:
vv prevent insertion for connection
vv lock the circuit breaker in connected or disconnected position
bb toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit
breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
bb telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles. The door can then be closed with the
Withdrawable Compact NSX250 DC. device in the connected and disconnected positions.
DB112209.eps

DB111369.eps

DB112219.eps

Installation positions.
Protection collar for toggle and toggle Telescopic shaft.
extension to provide IP4 in the connected and
DB112210.eps

disconnected positions.

Connected. Disconnected. Removed. Mounting


DB112220.eps

DB112221.eps

DB112312.eps

Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front Mounting on rails.


panel.

A-19

220EN_Catalogue.indb 19 25/11/2013 14:55:32


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Connection of fixed devices

Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard front Front connection
connection using bars or cables with lugs.
Cable connectors are available for bare cables. Rear Bars or cables with lugs
connection is also possible. Standard terminals
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC come with terminals comprising snap-in nuts with
screws:
bb Compact NSX100/160/250 DC: M8 nuts and screws
bb Compact NSX400/630 DC: M10 nuts and screws.
These terminals may be used for:
DB112169.eps
DB112168.eps

bb direct connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs


bb terminal extensions offering a wide range of connection possibilities.
Interphase barriers or terminal shields are recommended. They are mandatory for
certain connection accessories (in which case the interphase barriers are provided).
Insulated bar. Bars
When the switchboard configuration has not been tested, insulated bars are
DB112170.eps

mandatory.
Maximum size of bars
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 400 to 630
Without spreaders pitch (mm) 35 45
maximum bar size (mm) 20 x 2 32 x 6
With spreaders pitch (mm) 45 52.5
Small lug for copper cables. maximum bar size (mm) 32 x 2 40 x 6
Crimp lugs
DB112171.eps

There are two models, for aluminium and copper cables.


It is necessary to use narrow lugs, compatible with device connections. They must
be used with interphase barriers or long terminal shields. The lugs are supplied with
interphase barriers and may be used for the types of cables listed below.
Cable sizes for connection using lugs
Small lug for Al cables. Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 400 to 630
Copper cables size (mm²) 120, 150, 185 240, 300
crimping hexagonal barrels or punching
Aluminium cables size (mm²) 120, 150, 185 240, 300
DB112172.eps

DB112173.eps

DB112174.eps

crimping hexagonal barrels


Terminal extensions
Extensions with anti-rotation ribs can be attached to the standard terminals to
Straight terminal Right-angle terminal 45° terminal provide numerous connection possibilities in little space:
extensions. extensions. extensions. bb straight terminal extensions
bb right-angle terminal extensions
DB112175.eps

DB112176.eps

DB112177.eps

bb edgewise terminal extensions


bb double-L extensions
bb 45° extensions.
Spreaders
Edgewise terminal Double-L terminal Spreaders.
Spreaders may be used to increase the pitch:
extensions. extensions.
bb NSX100 to 250 DC: the 35 mm pitch can be increased to 45 mm
bb NSX400/630 DC: the 45 mm pitch can be increased to 52 or 70 mm.
Bars, cable lugs or cable connectors can be attached to the ends.
One-piece spreader for NSX100 to 250 DC
DB118544.eps

Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the
device terminals.
The one-piece spreader is the means to:
bb increase the 35 mm pitch of the NSX100 to 250 DC circuit breaker terminals to the
45 mm pitch of a NSX400/630 DC device
bb use all the connection and insulation accessories available for the next largest
frame size (lugs, connectors, spreaders, right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions, terminal shields and interphase barriers).
DB112179.eps

DB112180.eps

It may also be used for Compact INS switch-disconnectors.


Equipped with a single-piece spreader, Compact NSX DC devices can be mounted:
bb at the back of a switchboard
bb behind the front panel with a raiser.
The one-piece spreader is also the means to:
bb align devices with different frame sizes in the switchboard
bb use the same mounting plate, whatever the device.
Mounting at the Mounting
back of a behind the front Pitch (mm) depending on the type of spreader
switchboard. panel with a
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 100 to 630
raiser.
Without spreaders 35 45
With spreaders 45 52.5 or 70
With one-piece spreader 45 -

A-20

220EN_Catalogue.indb 20 25/11/2013 14:55:34


DB112313.eps

DB112314.eps
Bare cables
For bare cables (without lugs), the prefabricated bare-cable connectors may be used
for both copper and aluminium cables.
Cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or are secured by clips to
right-angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders.
Bare cable.
Cable connectors for Compact NSX400 to 630 DC
The connectors are screwed directly to the device terminals.
Cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 and 400/630 DC
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right-angle terminal extensions.
Distribution connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals. Interphase barriers are
supplied with distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields.
Each connector can receive six cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to
35 mm² each.

Maximum size of cables depending on the type of connector


Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100/160 250 400 630
DB112315.eps

DB112316.eps

DB112317.eps

DB111326.eps

Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm² b


Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm² b b
120 to 185 mm² b b
2 cables 50 to 120 mm² b b
1-cable 2-cable 2 cables 35 to 240 mm² b b
connector for connector for 35 to 300 mm² b b
NSX100 NSX400/ NSX100 NSX400/ Distribution connectors 6 cables 35 mm² b b
to 250 DC. 630 DC. to 250 DC. 630 DC.

Rear connection
DB111327.eps

Device mounting on a backplate with suitable holes enables rear connection.

Bars or cables with lugs


Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths. Bars may
Distribution connector for be positioned flat, on edge or at 45° angles depending on how the rear connections
NSX100 to 250 DC. are positioned.
The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals. All
combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given
device.
Four positions. Two lengths.
Bare cables
DB111329.eps

DB111330.eps

For the connection of bare cables, the 1-cable connectors for Compact NSX100
to 250 DC may be secured to the rear connections using clips.

Accessories for series and parallel connection


DB416293.eps

A limited number of accessories can be used to


DB414022.eps

optimise series and parallel connection of poles.

Cable connector. Accessories for series connection


DB414021.eps

These include series connection plates, equipped with


heat sinks.

Accessories for parallel connection Series connection plates


Parallel pole connection accessories are identical to equipped with heat sinks.
those for series connections. They are equipped with
heat sinks. Customer connections are made directly to
DB104729.eps
DB104728.eps

the connection plates after removing the heat sinks.


Rear connection.
DB111332.eps

DB104730.eps

Parallel connection plates.

Connection of bare cables to NSX100 to 250 DC by clips.

A-21

220EN_Catalogue.indb 21 25/11/2013 14:55:37


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Connection of electrical auxiliaries

Fixed Compact NSX100-250 DC


DB403554.EPS

Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.

Fixed Compact NSX DC.

Withdrawable or plug-in Compact NSX DC


DB403555.EPS

Automatic auxiliary connectors


Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
bb a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per
circuit breaker)
bb a fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare
cables up to 2.5 mm².
Micrologic trip unit options are also wired via the automatic auxiliary connectors.

Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors


Depending on the functions installed, one to three automatic auxiliary connectors are
required.

Plug-in/withdrawable
Compact NSX DC.
DB403557.eps
DB403556.eps

Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
Connector 3
DB111376.EPS

Compact
NSX100/160/250 DC.

Compact NSX400/630 DC.

Automatic auxiliary Moving part


connector:
Fixed part

A-22

220EN_Catalogue.indb 22 25/11/2013 14:55:39


Withdrawable Compact NSX DC
DB111379.EPS

Manual auxiliary connectors


As an option to the automatic auxiliary connectors, withdrawable circuit breakers
may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each. In "disconnected"
position, the auxiliaries remain connected.
They can then be tested by operating the device.

Nine-wire manual auxiliary connector.


Connector 1

DB403583.eps
Connector 2

DB115611.eps

Compact NSX100/160/250 DC.


Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 3

Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with


numbered terminals for connection of wires up to:
bb 1.5 mm² for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
bb 2.5 mm² for the motor mechanism module.

Circuit breaker Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3


OF1 OF2 OF3
MN/ SDE
MX NSX cord
MT
SD
24 V DC
NSX100/160/250 DC b b -
NSX400/630 DC b b b
MT: motor mechanism.

Compact NSX400/630 DC.

A-23

220EN_Catalogue.indb 23 25/11/2013 14:55:41


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX100/160/250 DC
Remote tripping
044313_30_SE.eps

MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.

MN undervoltage release
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping
threshold:
b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
b circuit breaker closing is possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage. For a lower value, circuit breaker closing cannot be guaranteed.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.

Time-delay unit for an MN release


Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.
It is used in conjunction with:
b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.

MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.

Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.

Mechanical characteristics
b Endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker.
b The releases clip in behind the front cover.
b Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks.

Electrical characteristics
b Consumption:
v pick-up (MX): < 30 VA
v seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.
b Response time: < 50 ms.

NA, TMD, TMG, MA


Standard
DB403010.eps

DB403012.eps

Motor mechanism /
rotary handle / toggle handle

SD SDE
OF1 OF2 OF2
SD SDE OF1
MN /
MX MN /
MX

A-24

220EN_Catalogue.indb 24 25/11/2013 14:55:42


Communication
Communication requires specific auxiliaries (see page A-30).
Communication of status indications (1)
bb 1 BSCM module.
bb 1 NSX cord (internal terminal block) for both communication and 24 V DC supply
to the BSCM.
Communication of status conditions is compatible with a toggle handle and a rotary
handle.
Communication of status indications and controls
This requires, in addition to the previous auxiliaries:
bb 1 IFM connected to the BSCM.

TMD, TMG
Communication of status indications (1)
Rotary handle / Communicating
DB403584.eps

DB403585.eps
toggle handle motor mechanism

BSCM BSCM
NSX cord
or
NSX cord

(1) Compact NSX100-250 DC only.

A-25

220EN_Catalogue.indb 25 25/11/2013 14:55:43


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX400/630 DC
Standard
All Compact NSX400/630 DC circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors have slots
for the electrical auxiliaries listed below.
5 indication contacts (see page A-27)
bb 3 ON/OFF (OF1, OF2, OF3)
bb 1 trip indication (SD)
bb 1 fault-trip indication (SDE).

1 remote-tripping release (see page A-31)


bb Either 1 MN undervoltage release.
bb Or 1 MX shunt release.

All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary


handle or toggle handle.

NA, MP1, MP2, MP3


Standard
Motor mechanism /
DB403013.eps

DB403586.eps

rotary handle / toggle handle

OF1,
OF2, SD
OF1 SD OF3
SDE
OF2
OF3 SDE

MN / MN /
MX MX

A-26

220EN_Catalogue.indb 26 25/11/2013 14:55:44


Functions
and characteristics
Indication contacts for Compact NSX DC

One contact model provides circuit breaker status These common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit breaker status
indications (OF - SD - SDE). information.
An early-make or early-break contact, in conjunction They can be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
with a rotary handle, can be used to anticipate device They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
opening or closing.
A CE / CD contact indicates that the chassis is Functions
connected / disconnected. Breaker-status indications, during normal operation or after a fault
A single type of contact provides all the different indication functions:
bb OF (ON/OFF) indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
bb SD (trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
vv an overload
vv a short-circuit
DB125549.eps

vv operation of a voltage release


vv operation of the "push to trip" button
vv disconnection when the device is ON.
The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
bb SDE (fault-trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
vv an overload
vv a short-circuit.
Indication contacts.
The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
Rotary-handle position contact for early-make or early-break functions
bb CAM (early-make or early-break function) contacts indicate the position of the
PB103706-68.eps

rotary handle.
They are used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break)
or to energise a control device prior to circuit breaker closing (early make).
Chassis-position contacts
bb CE/CD (connected/disconnected) contacts are microswitch-type carriage
switches for withdrawable circuit breakers.
CE/CD carriage switches.

Installation
bb OF, SD, SDE functions: a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts
clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
The SDE function on a Compact NSX100 - 250 DC equipped with a thermal-
magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator.
bb CAM function: the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
bb CE/CD function: the contacts clip into the fixed part of the chassis.

Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts


Contacts Standard Low level
Types of contacts All OF, SD, SDE
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V DC 1 mA at 4 V DC
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V AC/DC 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V AC/DC 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V AC/DC 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V AC 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V DC - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V AC 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V AC 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V AC 6 0.1 - - - - - -

A-27

220EN_Catalogue.indb 27 25/11/2013 14:55:44


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Rotary handles
For Compact NSX DC
There are two types of rotary handle: Direct rotary handle
b direct rotary handle
b extended rotary handle. Standard handle
There are two models: Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
b standard with a black handle The direct rotary handle maintains:
b red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. bb visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
bb suitability for isolation
bb indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
bb access to the "push to trip" button.
PB104936.eps

Device locking
The rotary handle facilitates circuit breaker locking.
bb Padlocking:
vv standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
vv with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs. In this case,
the handle remains the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping. Unlocking is
required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
bb Keylock (and padlock)
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the
handle to obtain the same functions as with a padlock.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
Compact NSX DC with a rotary handle. Early-make and/or early-break contacts may be used with the rotary handle. It is thus
possible to:
PB103607-50.eps

bb supply an MN undervoltage release before the circuit breaker closes


bb open the contactor control circuit before the circuit breaker opens.
MCC switchboard control
Control of an MCC switchboard is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In
addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Higher degree of protection IP
Degree of protection IP43, IK07.
The IP is increased by a built-in gasket.
Door locking depending on device position
bb The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or in the tripped position.
For exceptional situations, door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to
open the door when the circuit breaker is closed. This operation is not possible if the
handle is locked by a padlock.
bb Circuit breaker closing is disabled if the door is open. This function can be
Compact NSX DC with an MCC rotary handle. deactivated.
PB103608-50.eps

Machine-tool control in compliance with CNOMO


Control of a machine-tool is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In
addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Enhanced waterproofness and mechanical protection
bb Degree of protection IP54, IK08.
bb Compliance with CNOMO E03.81.501N.

Compact NSX DC with a CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle.

A-28

220EN_Catalogue.indb 28 25/11/2013 14:55:46


Rotary handles
For Compact NSX DC

Extended rotary handle


PB104939.eps

Degree of protection IP55, IK08.


The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at
the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
bb visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
bb suitability for isolation
bb indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped.
Mechanical door locking when device closed
A standard feature of the extended rotary handle is a locking function, built into the
shaft, that disables door opening when the circuit breaker is in the ON or tripped
positions.
Door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to open the door without
opening the circuit breaker. This operation is not possible if the handle is locked by a
Compact NSX DC with an extended rotary handle installed at padlock.
the back of a switchboard, with the keylock option and key. Voluntary disabling of mechanical door locking
A modification to the handle, that can be carried out on site, completely disables door
locking, including when a padlock is installed on the handle. The modification is
PB104940.eps

reversible.
When a number of extended rotary handles are installed on a door, this disabling
function is the means to ensure door locking by a single device.
Device and door padlocking
Padlocking locks the circuit breaker handle and disables door opening:
bb standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
bb with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs.
In this case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping.
Unlocking is required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
If the door controls were modified to voluntarily disable door locking, padlocking
does not lock the door, but does disable handle operation of the device.
Device locking using a keylock inside the switchboard
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the rotary
handle to lock the device in the OFF position or in either the ON or OFF positions.
Accessory for device operation with the door open
When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle, a control accessory
mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open.
bb The device can be padlocked in the OFF position.
bb The accessory complies with UL508.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
The extended rotary handle offers the same possibilities with early-make and/or
early-break contacts as the standard rotary handle.
Parts of the extended rotary handles
bb A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws).
bb An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally.
bb An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
vv 185…600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
vv 209…600 mm for Compact NSX400/630 DC.
For withdrawable devices, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft to compensate for device disconnection. In this case, the min/max
distances are:
vv 248…600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
vv 272...600 mm for Compact NSX400/630 DC.

Manual source-changeover systems


PB104937.eps

An additional accessory interlocks two devices with rotary handles to create a


source-changeover system. Closing of one device is possible only if the second is
open.
This function is compatible with direct or extended rotary handles.
Up to three padlocks can be used to lock in the OFF or ON position.

A-29

220EN_Catalogue.indb 29 25/11/2013 14:55:50


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Motor mechanism
For Compact NSX DC
When equipped with a motor mechanism module, Compact NSX DC circuit
PB113341.eps

breakers feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure
operation:
bb all circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
bb suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
bb double insulation of the front face.
A specific motor mechanism is required for operation via the communication
function (1). This communicating motor mechanism must be connected to the
BSCM module to receive the opening and closing orders. Operation is identical to
that of a standard motor mechanism.
Compact NSX250 DC with motor mechanism.
Applications
bb Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control.
bb Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
ensure availability or optimise energy costs.
bb Load shedding and reconnection.
bb Synchrocoupling.

Operation
The type of operation is selected using the manual/auto mode selection switch (7).
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the switch.
Automatic
When the switch is in the "auto" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons and the charging
lever on the mechanism are locked.
bb Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained signals.
1 2 3
DB416307.eps

bb Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with


standard wiring.
bb Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
Manual
When the switch is in the "manual" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons may be used.
0OFF discharged
A microswitch linked to the manual position can remote the information.
4 bb Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons I/O.
bb Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 8 times.
bb Padlocking in OFF position.

Installation and connections


All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
OFF ON
maintained.
Motor mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated
terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm².

8 7 6 5 Optional accessories
bb Keylock for locking in OFF position.
1 Position indicator bb Operations counter for the Compact NSX400/630 DC, indicating the number
(positive contact indication) of ON/OFF cycles. Must be installed on the front of the motor mechanism module.
2 Spring status indicator (charged, discharged)
3 Manual spring-charging lever Characteristics
4 Keylock device (optional)
Locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied Response time (ms) opening < 600
5 I (ON) pushbutton closing < 80
6 O (OFF) pushbutton Operating frequency cycles/minute max. 4
7 Manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 110/130 - 250
switch can be indicated remotely. AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 -
8 Operation counter (Compact NSX400/630 DC). 220/240 - 380/440
Consumption (1) DC (W) opening y 500
closing y 500
AC (VA) opening y 500
closing y 500
(1) For NSX100 to 250 DC, the inrush current is 2 In for 10 ms.

Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker + motor
DB403870.eps

50 mechanism module, in
40 thousands of operations
30 NSX100 DC (IEC 60947 2), at 440 V.
20 NSX160 DC
15
10 NSX250 DC

6 NSX400 DC
4 NSX630 DC

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 I/In


(1) NSX100-250 DC only.

A-30

220EN_Catalogue.indb 30 25/11/2013 14:55:51


Remote tripping
For Compact NSX DC

MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. They serve primarily
044313_20_SE.eps

for remote, emergency-off commands.


It is advised to test the system every six months.

MN undervoltage release
The MN release opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value
below 35 % of its rated voltage Un.
Undervoltage tripping, combined with an emergency-off button, provides fail-safe
MX or MN voltage release. tripping. The MN release is continuously supplied, i.e. if supply is interrupted:
bb either voluntarily, by the emergency-off button,
Failsafe opening Possible opening bb or accidentally, through loss of power or faulty wiring,
DB115605.eps

the release provokes opening of the circuit breaker.


0
0.35 0.7 1.1 Un Opening conditions
Opening conditions of the MN release. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Failsafe closing bb Automatic opening of the circuit breaker is ensured when the continuous voltage
DB115606.eps

supply to the release U y 0.35 x Un.


0
0.85 1.1 Un bb If the supply voltage is between 0.35 and 0.7 Un, opening is possible, but not
Closing conditions of the MN release. guaranteed. Above 0.7 Un, opening does not take place.
Closing conditions
If there is no supply to the MN release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker,
either manually or electrically. Closing is ensured when the voltage supply to the
release U u 0.85 x Un. Below this threshold, closing is not guaranteed.
Characteristics
PB104916.eps

Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240


50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Operating threshold Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
Closing 0.85 Un
Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 Un
MN voltage release. Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 10 - Hold: 5
Response time (ms) 50

Time-delay unit for an MN release


DB413345.eps

Delayed A time delay unit for the MN release eliminates the risk of nuisance tripping due to a
trip order transient voltage dip lasting y 200 ms. For shorter micro-outages, a system of
capacitors provides temporary supply to the MN at U > 0.7 to ensure non tripping.
DB115631.eps

10 12 The correspondence between MN releases and time-delay units is shown below.


Time-delay
unit Power supply Corresponding MN release
Unit with fixed delay 200 ms
3 6
Instantaneous 48 V AC 48 V DC
trip order 220 / 240 V AC 250 V DC
Unit with adjustable delay y 200 ms
D2 48 - 60 V AC/DC 48 V DC
100 - 130 V AC/DC 125 V DC
MN 220 - 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC

D1 MX shunt release
The MX release opens the circuit breaker via an impulse-type (u 20 ms) or
MN release with a time-delay Wiring diagram for maintained order.
unit. emergency-off function with Opening conditions
MN + time-delay unit. When the MX release is supplied, it automatically opens the circuit breaker. Opening
is ensured for a voltage U u 0.7 x Un.
Possible opening Failsafe opening Characteristics
DB115608.eps

Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240


0 50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
0.7 1.1 Un
V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Opening conditions of the MX release. Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 10
Response time (ms) 50

Circuit breaker control by MN or MX


When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
before it can be reclosed.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is
not possible.
Note: circuit breaker opening using an MN or MX release must
be reserved for safety functions. This type of tripping increases Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm² to integrated terminal blocks.
wear on the opening mechanism. Repeated use reduces the
mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker by 50 %.

A-31

220EN_Catalogue.indb 31 25/11/2013 14:55:52


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Locks
For Compact NSX DC
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking
DB111364.eps

DB111365.eps
systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to
8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Certain locking systems require an additional
accessory.

Control device Function Means Required accessories


Toggle Lock in OFF position Padlock Removable device
Lock in OFF or ON Padlock Fixed device
position
Direct rotary Standard Lock in Padlock -
Toggle locking using padlocks and an accessory: handle b OFF position Keylock Locking device + keylock
Removable device Fixed device attached to the b OFF or ON position (1)
case (3)
MCC Lock in Padlock -
b OFF position
DB111363.eps

b OFF or ON position (1)

CNOMO Lock in Padlock -


b OFF position
b OFF or ON position (1)
Extended rotary handle Lock in Padlock -
b OFF position
b OFF or ON position (1)
with door opening
prevented (2)
Lock in OFF position Padlock UL508 control accessory
Rotary-handle locking using
a keylock. b OFF or ON position (1) Keylock Locking device + keylock
inside the switchboard
Motor Lock in OFF position Padlock -
mechanism remote operation Keylock Locking device + keylock
disabled

Withdrawable circuit Lock in Padlock -


breaker b disconnected position
Keylock Locking device + keylock
b connected position Keylock Locking device + keylock
(1) Following a simple modification of the mechanism.
(2) Unless door locking has been voluntarily disabled.
(3) Only for 3-4P.
DB111358.eps

DB111359.eps

Rotary-handle locking using a padlock or a keylock.


DB125897.eps

DB111360.eps

Ø5...8

u auto u auto
man man

Motor mechanism locking using a padlock or a keylock.


DB111362.eps

DB111361.eps

Chassis locking in the connected position.

A-32

220EN_Catalogue.indb 32 25/11/2013 14:55:55


Sealing accessories
For Compact NSX DC

Outgoing-circuit identification
DB115224.eps

Compact NSX100 to 630 DC can be equipped with label holders supplied in sets of
ten (cat. no. LV429226).
They are compatible with escutcheons.

Identification accessories. Sealing accessories


Sealing accessories are available. Each bag of accessories contains all the parts
required for the types of sealing indicated below.
DB115033.eps

A bag contains:
bb 6 sealing accessories
bb 6 lead seals
bb 0.5 m of wire
bb 2 screws.
Sealing accessories.

Types of seals and corresponding functions


DB112300.eps

DB112301.eps

DB112303.eps
Toggle control
DB112302.eps

DB112306.eps

DB403120.eps
Rotary handle
DB112304.eps

DB112305.eps

DB112307.eps

Motor mechanism
DB125896.eps

Ø5...8
Ø5...8

u auto
man
u auto
man

auto

Ø5...8

uto

Types of seals Front-cover fixing screw Trip-unit transparent Motor mechanism Terminal-shield fixing
cover transparent cover screw
Protected operations bb front removal bb access to manual/auto bb access to power
bb access to auxiliaries bb modification of settings mode selection switch: connections (protection
bb trip-unit removal. bb access to test connector. depending on its position, against direct contact).
manual (1) or automatic
operation is not possible.
(1) In this case, local
operation is not possible.

A-33

220EN_Catalogue.indb 33 25/11/2013 14:55:58


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Escutcheons and protection collars
For Compact NSX DC
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the IP30 or IP40 escutcheons for fixed devices
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to IP40, IK07. Protection collars maintain the IP30
degree of protection, whatever the position of the The three types are glued to the cut-out in the front door of the switchboard:
device (connected, disconnected). bb escutcheon for all control types (toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism):
vv without access to the trip unit
vv with access to the trip unit.

IP40
PB104942.eps

The four types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
bb three escutcheons identical to the previous, but IP40
bb a wide model for Vigi and ammeter modules that can be combined with the above.
DB112290.eps
DB402617.eps

IP30 escutcheon.
PB104938.eps

Escutcheon for toggle without and with access to the trip unit.

IP30 escutcheon with access to the trip unit.

A-34

220EN_Catalogue.indb 34 25/11/2013 14:56:00


Escutcheons and protection collars
For Compact NSX DC

IP40 escutcheons for withdrawable devices


IP40 for withdrawable devices
The two types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
bb for rotary handle or motor mechanism: standard IP40 escutcheon
bb for toggle with extension: standard escutcheon + collar for withdrawal.
PB103777-36.eps

DB112294.eps

DB112295.eps

DB112296.eps
Ø5...8
Ø5
Ø5...8
...8

Escutcheon with collar for toggle.

Standard escutcheon with Standard escutcheon for Standard escutcheon with


rotary handle. motor mechanism. collar for withdrawal, for
toggle.
PB103775-40.eps

IP43 toggle cover


Available only for devices with toggles. Fits over toggle and front cover of the device.
bb Mounted on the front of the circuit breaker.
bb Degree of protection IP43, IK07.
DB112218.eps

Toggle cover.
PB103820_35.eps

Toggle cover.

Retrofit front covers


These replacement front covers make it possible to install NSX DC devices in
existing switchboards containing NSX devices by installing the NSX-type retrofit
covers on the NSX DC devices.
bb NSX100 to 250 DC cover.
bb NSX400/630 DC cover.
NSX retrofit front cover.

A-35

220EN_Catalogue.indb 35 25/11/2013 14:56:01


Functions Circuit breaker characteristics
and characteristics Compact NSX80 TM DC PV
to NSX500 TM DC PV

Compact NSX DC PV circuit breaker


PB110837.eps

Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 °C heatsink standard-IP4X
(free air + no venting)
Altitude m 2000
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue DC
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) DC 1000 V (4P series)
Compact NSX200 TM DC PV. (L/R 2 ms)
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
PB110846.eps

Suitability for isolation


Selectivity category (Utilisation category)
Pollution degree
Durability
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical (In) 1000 V
Protection
Overload/short-circuit protection thermal magnetic
Connection and insulation
Installation and connections
accessories.
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
motor mechanism
Connections fixed front connection
long rear connection
plug-in front connection
(on base) rear connection
withdrawable front connection
(on chassis) rear connection
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts OF auxiliary contact
SD, SDE trip, fault-trip
Voltage releases MX, MN shunt trip/undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories crimp lugs / bare cable connector
terminal extensions and spreaders
escutcheons
terminal shields and interphase barriers
Din rail adapter
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (w/o series connection) 4P
Weight (kg) fixed front connection 4P
(1) Double earth fault:
PV systems are either insulated from the earth or one pole is earthed through an overcurrent protection. In both set-ups,
therefore, there can be a ground fault in which current leaks to the ground. If this fault is not cleared, it may spread to the healthy
pole and give rise to a hazardous situation where fire could break out. Even though double insulation makes such an eventuality
unlikely, it deserves full attention.
For the two following reasons the double fault situation shall be absolutely avoided: insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent
protection in earthed system shall detect first fault and staff shall look after the first fault and clear it with no delay.
bb The fault level could be low (e.g. two insulation faults or a low short-circuit capability of the generator in weak sunlight) and
below the tripping value of overcurrent protection (circuit breaker or fuses). However, a DC arc fault does not extinguish itself,
even when the current is low. It could be a serious hazard, particularly for PV modules on buildings.
bb Circuit breakers and switches used in PV systems are designed to break the rated current or fault current with all poles at
open-circuit maximum voltage (UOC MAX). To break the current when UOC MAX is equal to 1000 V, four poles in series (two poles in
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at
full voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable
damage if used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
The ideal solution is to prevent double ground faults arising. Insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent protection in grounded
systems detect the first fault. However, although the insulation fault monitoring system usually stops the inverter, the fault is still
present. Staff must locate and clear it without delay. In large generators with sub-arrays protected by circuit breakers, it is highly
advisable to disconnect each array when that first fault has been detected but not cleared within the next few hours.

A-36

220EN_Catalogue.indb 36 25/11/2013 14:56:03


NSX80 TM NSX125 TM NSX160 TM NSX200 TM NSX250 TM NSX320 TM NSX400 TM NSX500 TM
DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

80 125 160 200 250 320 400 500

b b b b b b b b
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1)

50 % 50 % 50 % 50 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %


b b b b b b b b
A A A A A A A A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

10000 10000 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000 5000


1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

b b b b b b b b

b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -

b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b

b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - - -

140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110
2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1

A-37

220EN_Catalogue.indb 37 25/11/2013 14:56:04


Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics
characteristics
Compact NSX100 NA DC PV
to NSX500 NA DC PV
Compact NSX DC PV switch-disconnector
PB110838.eps

Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3
Rated current (A) In 40 °C
(free air + no venting)
Altitude m 2000
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue DC
Type of circuit breaker
Rated short circuit withstand Icw/Icm t=1s
current (kA rms),
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq kA
current with back-up fuse A gPV
Compact NSX200 NA DC PV. Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq with circuit breaker kA with MCCB
current
Utilization category
PB110847.eps

Suitability for isolation


Pollution degree
Durability
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical (In) 1000 V
Installation and connections
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
motor mechanism
Connections fixed front connection
long rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
Compact NSX200 NA DC PV. rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts OF auxiliary contact
SD, SDE trip, fault-trip
Voltage releases MX, MN shunt trip/undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories crimp lugs / bare cable connector
terminal extensions and spreaders
escutcheons
terminal shields and interphase barriers
Din rail adapter
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (w/o series connection) 4P
Weight (kg) (w/o series connection) 4P
(1) Double earth fault:
PV systems are either insulated from the earth or one pole is earthed through an overcurrent protection. In both set-ups,
therefore, there can be a ground fault in which current leaks to the ground. If this fault is not cleared, it may spread to the healthy
pole and give rise to a hazardous situation where fire could break out. Even though double insulation makes such an eventuality
unlikely, it deserves full attention.
For the two following reasons the double fault situation shall be absolutely avoided: insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent
protection in earthed system shall detect first fault and staff shall look after the first fault and clear it with no delay.
bb The fault level could be low (e.g. two insulation faults or a low short-circuit capability of the generator in weak sunlight) and
below the tripping value of overcurrent protection (circuit breaker or fuses). However, a DC arc fault does not extinguish itself,
even when the current is low. It could be a serious hazard, particularly for PV modules on buildings.
bb Circuit breakers and switches used in PV systems are designed to break the rated current or fault current with all poles at
open-circuit maximum voltage (UOC MAX). To break the current when UOC MAX is equal to 1000 V, four poles in series (two poles in
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at full
voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if
used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
The ideal solution is to prevent double ground faults arising. Insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent protection in grounded
systems detect the first fault. However, although the insulation fault monitoring system usually stops the inverter, the fault is still
present. Staff must locate and clear it without delay. In large generators with sub-arrays protected by circuit breakers, it is highly
advisable to disconnect each array when that first fault has been detected but not cleared within the next few hours.

A-38

220EN_Catalogue.indb 38 25/11/2013 14:56:06


NSX100 NA DC PV NSX160 NA DC PV NSX200 NA DC PV NSX400 NA DC PV NSX500 NA DC PV
4 4 4 4 4

100 160 200 400 500


heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP3X heatsink - IP3X
b b b b b
1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1)
8 8 8 8 8

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

2.5 2.5 2.5 6 6

10 10 10 10 10
100 160 200 400 500
10 10 10 - -
NSX125 TM DC PV NSX160-200 TM DC PV NSX200 TM DC PV
DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A
b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3

10000 10000 10000 5000 5000


1500 1000 1000 1000 1000

b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -

b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b

b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b - -

140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110
2.8 2.8 2.8 8.1 8.1

A-39

220E2205.indd 39 27/11/2013 15:34:43


Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics
characteristics
Compact NSX630b NA DC PV
to NSX1600 NA DC PV
Compact NSX DC PV switch-disconnector
PB112180_53.eps

Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3
Rated current (A) In 40 °C
(free air + no venting)
Altitude m 2000
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue DC
Type of circuit breaker
Compact NSX1600 NA DC PV. Rated short circuit withstand Icw/Icm t=1s
current (kA rms)
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq kA
current with back-up fuse A gPV
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq with circuit breaker
current
Utilization category
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree
Durability
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical (In) 1000 V

Installation and connections


Control manual
motor mechanism

Connections fixed front connection

rear connection

Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries


Indication contacts OF auxiliary contact
Voltage releases MX, MN shunt trip/undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions
escutcheons
terminal shields and interphase barriers
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (w/o series connection) 4P
Weight (kg) (w/o series connection) 4P
(1) Double earth fault:
PV systems are either insulated from the earth or one pole is earthed through an overcurrent protection. In both set-ups,
therefore, there can be a ground fault in which current leaks to the ground. If this fault is not cleared, it may spread to the healthy
pole and give rise to a hazardous situation where fire could break out. Even though double insulation makes such an eventuality
unlikely, it deserves full attention.
For the two following reasons the double fault situation shall be absolutely avoided: insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent
protection in earthed system shall detect first fault and staff shall look after the first fault and clear it with no delay.
bb The fault level could be low (e.g. two insulation faults or a low short-circuit capability of the generator in weak sunlight) and
below the tripping value of overcurrent protection (circuit breaker or fuses). However, a DC arc fault does not extinguish itself,
even when the current is low. It could be a serious hazard, particularly for PV modules on buildings.
bb Circuit breakers and switches used in PV systems are designed to break the rated current or fault current with all poles at
open-circuit maximum voltage (UOC MAX). To break the current when UOC MAX is equal to 1000 V, four poles in series (two poles in
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at full
voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if
used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
The ideal solution is to prevent double ground faults arising. Insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent protection in grounded
systems detect the first fault. However, although the insulation fault monitoring system usually stops the inverter, the fault is still
present. Staff must locate and clear it without delay. In large generators with sub-arrays protected by circuit breakers, it is highly
advisable to disconnect each array when that first fault has been detected but not cleared within the next few hours.

A-40

220EN_Catalogue.indb 40 25/11/2013 14:56:08


NSX630b NA DC PV NSX800b NA DC PV NSX1000 NA DC PV NSX1250 NA DC PV NSX1600 NA DC PV
4 4 4 4 4

630 800 1000 1250 1500


heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP0
b b b b b
1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1)
8 8 8 8 8

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

20 20 20 20 20

10 10 10 10 10
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
10 10 10 10 10

DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-B DC22-B


b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3

10000 10000 10000 10000 10000


1000 500 500 100 100

b b b b b
b b b b b

b b b b b

b b b b b

b b b b b
b b b b b

b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b

280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327x 182 280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327 x 182
18 18 18 18 18

A-41

220E2205.indd 41 27/11/2013 15:34:44


Functions
and characteristics
Accessories and auxiliaries
Overview of Compact NSX80 TM
to NSX500 TM DC PV circuit breakers
DB416573.eps

Terminal shields

Communication
(1)
(1)

NSX cord BSCM module


Heatsink
(1)

Modbus interface

Short terminal shield

Cable connectors

Terminal
Terminal shields Rear connectors
extensions

(1) Compact NSX100-250 only.

A-42

220EN_Catalogue.indb 42 25/11/2013 14:56:11


Overview of Compact NSX100 NA
to NSX500 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors
DB416574.eps

Terminal shields

Interphase barriers (2) Communication


(1)
(1)

NSX cord BSCM module

(1)

Heatsink

I I
n m

Modbus interface

Interphase barriers (2) Cable connectors

Terminal shields Terminal


Short terminal shield Rear connectors extensions

(1) Compact NSX100-250 only.


(2) Only for switches.

A-43

220EN_Catalogue.indb 43 25/11/2013 14:56:13


Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX630b NA
to NSX1600 NA DC PV
switch-disconnectors
DB416575.eps

Phase
barriers

Sealable terminal
shield

Heatsink

Auxiliary contact

Escutcheon

I ON
OOFF
pus h
pus h

Voltage release
ed
harg
disc

O OFF

53
012

Manual control with Communications


front connection module

Rear connectors Connection kit


for connectors

Vertical connection Terminal extension for


adapter cables with lugs

Phase barriers

Phase
barriers

Sealable terminal
shield

A-44

220EN_Catalogue.indb 44 25/11/2013 14:56:15


A-45

220EN_Catalogue.indb 45 25/11/2013 14:56:15


Functions
and characteristics
General characteristics
of Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Operating conditions

Masterpact circuit breakers have been tested for


operation in industrial atmospheres. It is
recommended that the equipment be cooled or heated
to the proper operating temperature and kept free of
excessive vibration and dust.

Ambient temperature
DB402051.eps

Masterpact devices can operate under the following temperature conditions:


bb the electrical and mechanical characteristics are stipulated for an ambient
temperature of -25 °C to +70 °C
bb circuit-breaker closing is guaranteed down to -35 °C by manual operation (push
button).
Storage conditions are as follows:
bb -40 to +85 °C for a Masterpact device without its control unit
bb -25 °C to +85 °C for the control unit.

Extreme atmospheric conditions


DB402052.eps

Masterpact devices have successfully passed the tests defined by the following
standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
bb IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -40 °C
bb IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 °C
bb IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 °C, relative humidity 95 %)
bb IEC 60068-2-52 level 2: salt mist.
Masterpact devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard
IEC 60947 (pollution degree up to 4).
It is nonetheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled
switchboards without excessive dust.

Vibrations
DB128163.eps

Masterpact devices have successfully passed testing in compliance with


IEC 60068-2-6 for the following vibration levels:
bb 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Vibration testing to these levels is required by merchant marine inspection
organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc). Some applications have vibration profiles
outside of this standard and require special attention during application design,
installation, and use. Excessive vibration may cause unexpected tripping, damage to
connections or to other mechanical parts. Please refer to the Masterpact
maintenance guide (causes of accelerated ageing / operating conditions / vibrations)
for additional information.
Examples of applications with high vibration profiles could include:
bb wind turbines
bb power frequency converters that are installed in the same switchboard or close
proximity to the Masterpact circuit breaker
bb emergency generators
bb high vibration marine applications such as thrusters, anchor positioning systems,
etc.

A-46

220EN_Catalogue.indb 46 25/11/2013 14:56:17


Masterpact NW DC and DC PV

Altitude
DB128162.eps

(m)
2000 At altitudes higher than 2000 metres, the modifications in the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) lower the following characteristics as follows:
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
NW DC
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 10.6 9.5 8.4
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 1000 900 800 700
Maximum rated operationnal NW DC y500 V 500 450 390 350
voltage 50/60 Hz Ue (V) NW DC 500-900 V 900 800 700 630
Rated current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.98 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
NW DC PV
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 10.6 9.5 8.4
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 1000 1000 950 850
Maximum rated operationnal DC voltage 1000 1000 950 850
Rated current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.98 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

Electromagnetic disturbances
DB128164.eps

Masterpact NW DC devices are protected against:


bb overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
bb overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
bb devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
bb electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Masterpact NW DC devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-
compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
bb IEC 60947-2, appendix F
bb IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with earth-leakage function).
The above tests guarantee that:
bb no nuisance tripping occurs
bb tripping times are respected.

Degree of protection
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers offer the following protection characteristics
depending on the installation conditions:
b IP: degree of protection (standard IEC 60529)
b IK: protection against external mechanical impacts (standard EN 50102).

Masterpact NW DC
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard
Bare circuit breaker IP30
DB104534.eps

Escutcheon (CDP) for fixed and drawout IP40 IK07


versions, with blanking plate

Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon IP54 IK10


PB100776-20R.eps

for drawout version

A-47

220EN_Catalogue.indb 47 25/11/2013 14:56:18


Functions
and characteristics
General characteristics
of Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Masterpact NW DC circuit breaker


PB104917.eps

Poles coupling version C or D (3 poles)


E (4 poles)
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1/ 60947-2 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-2
Rated current at 40 °C / 50 °C (1) In (A)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV peak)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC)
Type of circuit breaker
NW10 DC 3P. Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 5 ms Icu (kA) V DC 500
750
900
PB105024_42.eps

L/R = 15 ms Icu 500


750
900
L/R = 30 ms Icu 500
750
900
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
Rated making capacity Icm % Icu
Short-time withstand current Icw 1s
NW10 DC 4P. Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Making time (ms)
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree (as per IEC 60664-1)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page A-50)
Trip units Built-in
Protection Overloads
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical With maintenance
Without maintenance
Electrical Without maintenance 500 V DC
900 V DC
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts
Voltage release MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Switch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Type of switch-disconnector
Rated making capacity Icm (kA)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Unprotected circuit breaker (500 V DC only)
Tripping by shunt trip as per IEC 60947-2
Type of unprotected circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 6.5 ms Icu (kA) 500 V DC
Short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 15 ms Icu (kA) 500 V DC
Short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
Overload and short-circuit protection
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 500 ms
Installation and connections
Connection Drawout 3P RC Horizontal
4P Vertical
Fixed 3P RC Horizontal
4P Vertical
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions Drawout 3P
H x W x D (mm) connected in series 4P
Fixed 3P
4P
Weight (kg) Drawout 3P
connected in series (approximate values) 4P
Fixed 3P
4P
(1) 50 °C - see the derating table for the NW40 DC.

A-48

220EN_Catalogue.indb 48 25/11/2013 14:56:19


NW10 DC NW20 DC NW40 DC
b b b
b b b

1000 2000 4000


1000 1000 1000
12 12 12
500/900 500/900 500/900
N H N H N H
85 100 85 100 85 100
- 85 - 85 - 85
- 85 - 85 - 85
35 85 35 85 35 85
- 50 - 50 - 50
- 35 - 35 - 35
25 50 25 50 25 50
- 50 - 50 - 50
- 25 - 25 - 25
100 %
100 %
50 85 50 85 50 85
B
30 to 75
< 70
b b b b b b
4

b b b b b b
- - - - - -
b b b b b b

20000
10000
8500 5000 2000
- 2000 - 2000 - 1000

b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b

HA HA HA
- 85 - 85 - 85
- 85 - 85 - 85

NW10 HADC-C 500V DC NW20 HADC-C 500V DC NW40 HADC-C 500V DC


85 85 85
85 85 85
65 65 65
65 65 65
100 %
- - -

b b b b - -
b b b b b b
b b b b - -
b b b b b b

439 x 441 x 494 439 x 441 x 594


439 x 556 x 494 439 x 556 x 594
352 x 422 x 427 352 x 422 x 527
352 x 537 x 427 352 x 537 x 527
90 to 116
125 to 146
60 to 86
85 to 106

A-49

220EN_Catalogue.indb 49 25/11/2013 14:56:19


Functions Trip-unit characteristics
and characteristics Trip units for Masterpact NW DC

All Masterpact NW DC devices Protection using the Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit
are equipped with a Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit.
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers use Micrologic 1.0 DC control units. These
interchangeable units with instantaneous thresholds, operating with electromagnetic
sensors, can be adjusted on site.
The circuit breakers can be used with the three versions of sensors,
defined by their setting range.
PB101139-32R.eps

Type of sensor 1250/2500 A 2500/5400 A 5000/11000 A


Masterpact NW10 DC b b b
Masterpact NW20 DC - b b
Masterpact NW40 DC - - b

Adjustments
Settings for Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers may be accessed from the front,
with the switchboard door open.
b Settings are made for the input (+ pole) and the output (- pole).
b The setting range comprises eleven positions, plus five preferential settings
marked A, B, C, D and E.
b The setting values for the two corresponding sensors must be identical.
DB403050.eps
DB402618.eps

Magnetic pick-up value.

Two identical settings.

A-50

220EN_Catalogue.indb 50 25/11/2013 14:56:20


Setting values for magnetic pick-up Im
Settings marked A, B, C, D and E
DB104542.eps

Minimum Maximum
Sensor versions Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings
A1 and A2 B1 and B2 C1 and C2 D1 and D2 E1 and E2
1250/2500 1250 A 1500 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
2500/5400 2500 A 3300 A 4000 A 5000 A 5400 A
5000/11000 5000 A 8000 A 10000 A 11000 A 11000 A

Tolerances ±8 % ±10 % ±10 % ±10 % ±10 %

DB403114.eps

Intermediate settings
It is possible to set eleven other (unmarked) intermediate values.
DB403115.eps

A-51

220EN_Catalogue.indb 51 25/11/2013 14:56:21


Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics
for PV application
Masterpact NW HADCD-PV
PB113343_32.eps

Masterpact NW HADCD-PV NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV


switch-disconnectors for PV application
Poles coupling version D (3 poles) b b
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1 / 60947-3 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-3
Rated current at 40/45 °C In (A) 2000 4000
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000
Rated impulse Uimp (kV peak) 12 12
withstand voltage
(1)
Masterpact NW20 Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC) 1000 1000 (1)
HADCD-PV. Switch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Rated making capacity Icm (kA) 85 85
Rated short-time Icw (kA/1 s) 85 85
withstand current
DB416572.eps

Masterpact Utilization category DC-22A DC-22A


NW20 HADCD-PV Durability
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV (O/C cycles) Mechanical with maintenance 20000 20000
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series without maintenance 10000 10000
Icw 85kA/1s Electrical without 1000 V DC 2000 1000
Icm 85kA maintenance L/R = 2 ms
Installation and connections
Connection Fixed rear Vertical b b
IEC 60947-3
connections Horizontal b -
Drawout rear Vertical b b
Ith 2000A 55°C
connections Horizontal b -
Ue (V) Ie (A)
Dimensions and weight
DC22A 1000 2000
Dimensions Fixed 3P 352 x 422 x 427 352 x 422 x 527
H x W x D (mm) with the Drawout 3P 439 x 441 x 494 439 x 441 x 594
series connection
Masterpact NW20 Weight (kg) Fixed 3P 60 to 86
HADCD-PV rating plate.
with the series connection Drawout 3P 90 to 116
(approximate values)
All the accessories of the standard NW HADC switch-disconnectors can be used.
(1) NW HADCD-PV switch-disconnectors for PV applications are designed and qualified to break the rated or the fault current
DB416460.eps

Masterpact under 1000 V DC with all the 3 poles in series and this is a mandatory condition whatever the type of fault. This comes to say that
NW40 HADCD-PV the PV systems using these switch-disconnectors must be isolated systems from the earth and that the double fault situation (A
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV and D or C and E on the diagram below) must be absolutely avoided : insulation monitoring devices shall detect the first fault and
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series the staff shall look for this first fault and clear it with no delay. These switch-disconnectors cannot be used in grounded systems as
Icw 85kA/1s in this situation they may be expected to break the current under the full voltage (1000 V DC) with only 1 pole or 2 poles in series.
Icm 85kA These devices are not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if used to break in these conditions.
DB116984.eps

IEC 60947-3

Ith 4000A 45°C


Ue (V) Ie (A)
DC22A 1000 4000

Masterpact NW40 Isolated system.


HADCD-PV rating plate.

A-52

220EN_Catalogue.indb 52 25/11/2013 14:56:22


Connections and safety clearances

Fixed version, vertical rear connections


NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV
DB402264_55.eps

DB402268_55.eps
Safety clearances Insulated Metal parts Energised
parts parts
DB416461.eps

DB416462.eps

A 0 0 100
B 0 0 60

F : Datum.
A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.

Drawout version, vertical rear connections


NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV
DB402291_55.eps

DB402311_55.eps

Safety clearances Insulated Metal parts Energised


parts parts
DB416463.eps

DB416464.eps

A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60

F : Datum.

A-53

220EN_Catalogue.indb 53 25/11/2013 14:56:25


Functions Communication
and characteristics COM option in Masterpact NW DC

The COM option is required for integration of the circuit For fixed devices, the COM option is made up of:
breraker or switch disconnector in a supervision bb a Modbus BCM ULP “device” communication module, installed behind the
system. Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE ,PF and CH
Masterpact uses the Modbus communications protocol micro switches) its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases
for full compatibility with the ION enterprise. An external and its COM terminal block (inputs E1 to E6).
gateway is available for communication on other For drawout devices, the COM option is made up of:
networks: bb a Modbus BCM ULP “device” communication module, installed behind the
b Profibus Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE, PF and CH
b Ethernet. micro switches) its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases
and its COM terminal block (inputs E1 to E6).
bb a “chassis” communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors (CE,
CD and CT contacts) Modbus CCM.
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the device indication contacts.
These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
Modbus BCM ULP “Device” communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
unit and the communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
PB106674-20.eps

Modbus CCM “chassis” communication module


This module is independent of the control unit. With Modbus “chassis”
communication module, this module makes it possible to address the chassis and to
maintain the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases
The XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases are equipped for connection to
the “device” communication module.
The remote-tripping function (MX2 or MN) are independent of the communication
option. They are not equipped for connection to the “device” communication module.
Modbus BCM ULP “device”
communication module.
DB402049.eps
PB100802B-27.eps

CCM

Modbus CCM “chassis”


communication module.

1  Modbus BCM ULP “Device” communication module. : Hard wire.


2  Modbus CCM “Chassis” communication module (option). : Modbus.
3  OF, SDE, PF and CH micro switches.
4  CE, CD and CT contacts.
5  XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases.
6  Micrologic control unit.
7  COM terminal block (E1 to E6).

A-54

220EN_Catalogue.indb 54 25/11/2013 14:56:27


Overview of functions

Four functional levels


The Masterpact can be integrated into a Modbus communication environment.
There are four possible functional levels that can be combined.

Communication functions
Switch-disconnector
and circuit breaker
with communication
Modbus
Device identification
Address b
Rating -
Type of device -
Type of control unit -
Status indications
ON/OFF (OF) b
Spring charged (CH) b
Ready to close (PF) see page D-10
Fault-trip (SDE) b
Connected/disconnected/test position (CE/CD/CT) b
Controls
ON/OFF (MX/XF) b
Spring charging -
Reset of the mechanical indicator -

Communication Modbus
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact NSX DC with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM700,
PM800, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers
may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The Modbus communication parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered
using the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility.
Modbus addresses
@xx Circuit breaker manager (1 to 47)
@xx + 50 Chassis manager (51 to 97)

The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit breaker address
@xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47).
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX DC, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended),
the volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical
layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on
the device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).

A-55

220E2410.indd 55 26/11/2013 13:44:51


Functions
and characteristics
Masterpact NW communication
Networks and sofware

Masterpact uses the Modbus communication protocol, Modbus


compatible with ION-E electrical engineering expert Modbus is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks.
system software. It operates in master-slave mode. The devices (slaves) communicate one after the
Two downloadable sofware (RSU, RCU) other with a gateway (master).
from schneider-electric.com facilitate implementation Masterpact NW DC, Compact NSX DC, PowerLogic and Sepam products all operate
of communication functions. with this protocol. A Modbus network is generally implemented on an LV or MV
switchboard scale. Depending on the data monitored and the desired refresh rate, a
Modbus network connected to a gateway can serve 4 to 16 devices. For larger
installations, a number of Modbus networks can be connected to an Ethernet
network (TCP/IP/Modbus protocol) via their gateways (EGX).

Automatic
DB404305.eps

Firewall notification

Nomad
Internet
mode

Site Intranet
Ethernet (TCP/IP/Modbus)

Consultation Consultation
EGX300 RCU RCU

Modbus

CCM FDM121

FDM121

Masterpact DC Compact NSX DC

Ethernet (TCP/IP/Modbus)
Modbus
ULP

A-56

220EN_Catalogue.indb 56 25/11/2013 14:56:29


RCU (Remote Control Utility)
PB108203.eps

RCU

Gateway
The gateway has two functions:
bb access to the company intranet (Ethernet) by converting Modbus frames to the
TCP/IP/Modbus protocol
bb optional web-page server for the information from the devices.
Examples include EGX100 and EGX300.
PE86181r-251.eps

EGX 300.

A-57

220EN_Catalogue.indb 57 25/11/2013 14:56:30


Functions
and characteristics
Masterpact DC communication
RCU utilities

RCU, are available to assist in starting up a RCU (Remote Control Utility)


communicating installation. The RCU utility can be used to test communication for all the devices connected to
They can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric the Modbus network. It is designed for use with Masterpact, Compact NSX DC,
internet site and include a “Live update” function that Advantys OTB and Power Meter devices. It offers a number of functions.
enables immediate updating.Schneider Electric
Mini supervisor
electrical installation supervision, management and bb Display of ON/OFF status.
expert system software integrates Masterpact DC,
Compact DC and Compact NSX DC identification Open and close commands for each device
A common or individual password must first be entered.
modules.
When all functions have been tested, this utility is replaced by the supervision
software selected for the installation.

PB108204.eps

RCU: Remote Control Utility for communication tests.

A-58

220EN_Catalogue.indb 58 25/11/2013 14:56:30


Supervision software

Types of software
Masterpact and Compact NSX DC communication functions are designed
to interface with software dedicated to electrical installations:
bb switchboard supervision
bb electrical installation supervision
bb process control
bb SCADA (Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition), EMS (Enterprise Management
System) or BMS (Building Management System) type software.

Schneider Electric solutions


PE86181r-25.eps

Electrical switchboard supervision via EGX300 Web servers


A simple solution for customers who want to consult the main electrical parameters
of switchboard devices without dedicated software.
Up to 16 switchboard devices are connected via Modbus interfaces to an EGX300
Ethernet gateway integrating the functions of a web page server. The embedded
Web pages can be easily configured with just a few mouse clicks. The information
they provide is updated in real time.
EGX300.
The Web pages can be consulted using a standard Web browser on a PC connected
via Ethernet to the company Intranet or remotely via a modem. Automatic notification
of alarms and threshold overruns is possible via e-mail or SMS (Short Message
Service).
PB104859.eps

Electrical installation supervision via iRIO RTU


The iRIO RTU (remote terminal unit) can be used as Ethernet coupler for the
PowerLogic System devices and for any other communicating devices operating
under Modbus RS485 protocol. Data is viewable via a standard web browser.

iRIO RTU. ION-E electrical engineering expert system software


ION-E is a family of web-enabled software products for high-end power-monitoring
PB104807_68.eps

applications. It is designed for large power systems.

Other software
Masterpact, Compact NSX DC devices can forward their operating information to
special software integrating the electrical installation and other technical facilities:
bb SCADA process control software: Vijeo CITECT
bb BMS Building Management System software: Vista.

ION-E.

A-59

220EN_Catalogue.indb 59 25/11/2013 14:56:31


Functions Panorama of electrical and
and characteristics
mechanical accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

All Masterpact NW DC devices

PB104736.eps
exist in circuit-breaker (equipped with Micrologic DC
1.0 control unit) and switch-disconnector versions. All
auxiliaries are common from 1000 to 4000 A.

1 OFF pushbutton.
2 ON pushbutton.
3 Closing mechanism charging handle.
4 Operation counter.
5 Operating mechanism charged and “ready to close”
indication:
b spring charged
DB104522.eps

b spring discharged.

6 Main contact position indication:


b ON
DB104523.eps

b OFF.

7 Fault trip indication and reset button.


8 Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit.
9 Racking interlock.
10 Racking-handle storage.
11 Shutter position indication and locking.
12 “Connected / test / disconnected”
position indication.
13 Racking-handle port.
14 Reset pushbutton.
15 Padlock locking.
16 Keylock locking.

Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors


PB104432-48R.eps

Masterpact NW DC exists in fixed and withdrawable versions:


b circuit breaker equipped with Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit
b switch-disconnector without the control unit.

Common auxiliaries from 1000 to 4000 A


All accessories are:
b accessible from the front in a compartment isolated from the power circuits
b secured by a single screw
b no adjustments
b adaptable on site.

Vertical rear connection. Communication


Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector integration in a supervision system requires
the COM option.
DB101149.eps

Masterpact uses the Modbus communication protocol compatible with ION-E


electrical engineering expert system software.
An external gateway is available for communication with other networks (Profibus,
Ethernet, etc.).

Connections
b Rear vertical connection in standard.
b Possibility of conversion to horizontal connection by turning the connectors
on the site by the customer (except for the NW40).
b Prefabricated series connections.
b Safety shutters, shutter locking blocks.
b Optional accessories:
v interphase barriers
v shutter position indication and locking.

A-60

220EN_Catalogue.indb 60 25/11/2013 14:56:32


Locking

PB104367A32.eps

PB104366A32.eps

PB100780-32R_SE.eps
b Pushbutton locking by padlockable transparent
cover.
b OFF-position locking by padlock or keylock.
b Chassis locking:
v in disconnected position by keylock
v in connected, disconnected and test positions.
b Door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in
connected position).
b Racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open).
b Racking interlock between crank and OFF
pushbutton.
b Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal.
b Mismatch protection. Locking in disconnected position by keylock or padlock. Door interlock (inhibits door
opening with breaker in
connected position).

Indication contacts
PB100806-19R.eps

PB100807-12R.eps

PB100820-19R.eps

PB100816-19R.eps
b Standard or low-level contacts:
v ON/OFF indication (OF)
v “fault-trip” indication (SDE)
v carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected
(CD) and test (CT) positions.

OF contact OF contact SDE contact. Combined contact


(microswitch). (rotary). (connected/closed).

Remote operation
PB104349A55.eps

PB100808-22R.eps

PB100809-11R.eps

PB100818-11R.eps
b Remote ON/OFF:
v gear motor
v XF closing or MX opening voltage releases
v PF ready-to-close contact
v options:
- RAR automatic or Res electrical remote reset
- BPFE electrical closing pushbutton.
b Remote tripping function:
v MN voltage release:
- standard
- adjustable or non-adjustable delay
v or 2nd MX voltage release.

Remote ON/OFF. Gear motor. Voltage PF


releases ready-to-
(MX and XF). close
contact.

Accessories
DB104524.eps

b Auxiliary terminal shield.


b Operation counter.
PB100776-29R.eps

b Escutcheon.
b Transparent cover for escutcheon.
PB104382-27R.eps

b Escutcheon blanking plate.

Operation counter. Escutcheon with blanking plate. Transparent cover.

A-61

220EN_Catalogue.indb 61 25/11/2013 14:56:34


Functions Connection
and characteristics Overview of solutions

Two types of connection are available: vertical Rear connection fixed device
connection is standard however the connectors can be
Masterpact NW DC
rotated for on-site conversion to horizontal connection
(except for NW40). Vertical rear connection

PB105026.eps

Horizontal rear connection


PB105025.eps

A-62

220EN_Catalogue.indb 62 25/11/2013 14:56:34


Connection
Overview of solutions

Rear connection withdrawable device


Masterpact NW DC
Horizontal rear connection
DB402291_59.eps

DB402303_59.eps

Vertical rear connection


PB104920_59.eps

DB402323_59.eps

A-63

220EN_Catalogue.indb 63 25/11/2013 14:56:36


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Locking on the device


1 Fault trip indication and

DB125380.eps
reset button.
2 OFF position locking.
3 Electrical closing
pushbutton.
4 ON pushbutton.
5 OFF pushbuton.
6 Operating mechanism
charged and “ready to
close” indication.
7 Pushbutton locking.
8 Main contact position
indication.
9 Operation counter.

Pushbutton locking VBP


PB100811-32R.eps

The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the
device.
It is possible to independently lock the opening button and the closing button.
The locking device is often combined with a remote operating mechanism.
The pushbuttons may be locked using either:
b three padlocks (not supplied)
b lead seal
Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover. b two screws.

Device locking in the OFF position


PB100810-32R.eps

VCPO - by padlocks - VSPO - by keylocks


The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied)
b using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied).
Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations:
b one keylock
b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for
interlocking with another device
Pushbutton locking using a padlock. b two different key locks for double locking.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
PB100812-32R.eps

Accessory-compatibility
3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocks.

Cable-type door interlock IPA


This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.
This option is identical for fixed or drawout versions.
OFF position locking using a padlock.
PB104381A-40R.eps

OFF position locking using a keylock.

A-64

220EN_Catalogue.indb 64 25/11/2013 14:56:37


Locking on the chassis
1 Racking-handle port.

DB125388.eps
2 “Connected/test/
disconnected” position
indication.
3 Racking interlock.
4 Racking-handle storage.
5 Reset pushbutton.
6 Padlock locking.
7 Keylock locking.
8 Chassis front plate
(accessible with cubicle
door closed).
9 “Disconnected” position
door interlock.
10 Mismatch protection.

“Disconnected” position locking


By padlocks (standard) or keylocks (VSPD option)
Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the
circuit breaker in the “disconnected” position in two manners:
b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)
b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:
b one keylock
b two different keylocks for double locking
b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the chassis + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

Connected”, “disconnected” and “test” position locking


The “connected”, “disconnected” and “test” positions are shown by an indicator and
are mechanically indexed. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle
blocks. A release button is used to free it.
As standard, the circuit breaker can be locked only in “disconnected” position. On
request, the locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the
three positions “connected”, “disconnected” or “test”.

Door interlock catch VPEC


Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position. It the
breaker is put in the “connected” position with the door open, the door may be closed
without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
PB104737A.eps

Racking interlock VPOC


This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.

Cable-type door interlock IPA


This option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.
Racking interlock.
Racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton
IBPO for NW DC
This option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the
racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.
PB100815-32R_SE.eps

Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal


DAE for NW DC
This option discharges the springs before the breaker is removed from the chassis.

Mismatch protection VDC


Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on
Mismatch protection.
the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.

A-65

220EN_Catalogue.indb 65 25/11/2013 14:56:39


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Indication contacts are available: Indication contacts


b in the standard version for relay applications
b in a low-level version for control of PLCs and ON/OFF indication contacts OF
electronic circuits. Rotary type changeover contacts directly driven by the mechanism. These contacts
trip when the minimum isolation distance between the main circuit-breaker contacts
PB100806-32R.eps

is reached.
OF
Supplied as standard 4
Maximum number 12
Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 10/6 (1)
AC12/DC12 480 10/6 (1)
690 6
V DC 24/48 10/6 (1)
125 10/6 (1)
250 3
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 6
240 6
380 3
V DC 24/48 6
125 6
250 3
(1) Standard contacts: 10 A; optional contacts: 6 A.

ON/OFF indication contacts OF (microswitch type).


“Fault-trip” indication contacts SDE
Circuit-breaker tripping due to a fault is signalled by:
b a red mechanical fault indicator (reset)
PB100807-20R.eps

b one changeover contact SDE.


Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker
may be closed. One SDE is supplied as standard. An optimal SDE may be added.
This latter is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (Res).
SDE
Supplied as standard 1
Maximum number 2
ON/OFF indication contacts OF (rotary type). Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 5
AC12/DC12 480 5
PB100820-32R.eps

690 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15

Additional “fault-trip” indication contacts SDE. Combined “connected/closed” contacts EF


The contact combines the “device connected” and the “device closed” information to
produce the “circuit closed” information. Supplied as an option for Masterpact
PB100816-32R.eps

NW DC, it is mounted in place of the connector of an additional OF contact.


EF
Maximum number 8
Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC12/DC12 480 6
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
Combined contacts.
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3

A-66

220EN_Catalogue.indb 66 25/11/2013 14:56:40


“Connected”, “disconnected” and “test” position carriage
PB100817-32R.eps

switches
Three series of optional auxiliary contacts are available for the chassis:
b changeover contacts to indicate the “connected” position CE
b changeover contacts to indicate the “disconnected” position CD. This position is
indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits
is reached.
b changeover contacts to indicate the “test” position CT. In this position, the power
circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected.
Additional actuators
A set of additional actuators may be installed on the chassis to change the functions
of the carriage switches.
CE, CD and CT “connected/disconnected/test” position
carriage switches. Contacts CE CD CT
Maximum number Standard with additional 3 3 3
actuators 9 0 0
6 3 0
6 0 3
3 6 0
Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240 8
AC12/DC12
380 8
480 8
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3

A-67

220EN_Catalogue.indb 67 25/11/2013 14:56:41


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Two solutions are available for remote operation of Remote operation: remote ON / OFF
Masterpact devices:
The remote ON / OFF function is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker.
b a point-to-point solution
It is made up of:
b a bus solution with the COM communication option. b an electric motor MCH equipped with a “springs charged” limit switch contact CH
b two voltage releases:
v a closing release XF
v an opening release MX.
Optionally, other functions may be added:
PB104349A-68R.eps

b a “ready to close” contact PF


b an electrical closing pushbutton BPFE
b remote RES following a fault.
A remote-operation function is generally combined with:
b device ON / OFF indication OF
b “fault-trip” indication SDE.

Wiring diagram of a point-to-point remote ON / OFF function


Note
DB402619.eps

An opening order always takes priority over a closing order.


If opening and closing orders occur simultaneously, the
mechanism discharges without any movement of the main
contacts. The circuit breaker remains in the open position
(OFF).
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the
standard mechanism provides an anti-pumping function by
blocking the main contacts in open position.
Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening
using the manual or electrical controls, the closing order must
first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit
breaker.
When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is
installed, to avoid pumping following a fault trip, the automatic
control system must take into account the information supplied
by the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or
blocking the circuit breaker in the open position. (information
on type of fault: overload, short time delay, earth-leakage fault,
fault vigi or short-circuit, etc.)

Wiring diagram of a bus-type remote ON / OFF function


Note
DB402620.eps

MX communicating releases are of the impulse type only and


cannot be used to lock a circuit breaker in OFF position. For
locking in OFF position, use the remote tripping function
(2nd MX or MN).

When Mx or XF communicating releases are used, the third


wire (C3, A3) must be connected even if the communication
module is not installed. When the control voltage (C3-C1 or
A3-A1) is applied to the MX or XF releases, it is necessary to
wait 1.5 seconds before issuing an order. consequently, it is
advised to use standrad MX or XF releases for applications
such as source-changeover systems.

COM

A-68

220EN_Catalogue.indb 68 25/11/2013 14:56:42


Electric motor MCH
PB100808-32R.eps

The electric motor automatically charges and recharges the spring mechanism when
the circuit breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible
following opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle is used only as a backup
if auxiliary power is absent.
The electric motor (MCH) is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact (CH)
that signals the “charged” position of the mechanism (springs charged).

Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277 - 380/415 - 400/440 - 480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s
Charging time maximum 4 seconds
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
CH contact 10 A at 240 V

Voltage releases XF and MX


Their supply can be maintained or automatically disconnected.
Electric motor MCH for Masterpact NW DC.
Closing release XF
The XF release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is
charged.
DB402621.eps

Opening release MX
The MX release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. It locks
the circuit breaker in OFF position if the order is maintained (except for MX
“communicating” releases).
Note: whether the operating order is maintained or automatically disconnected (pulse-type), XF
or MX “communicating” releases (“bus” solution with “COM” communication option) always have
an impulse-type action.

Characteristics XF MX
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms)
PB100809-16R.eps

hold: 4.5 hold: 4.5


Circuit-breaker response time at Un 70 ms ±10 (NW DC y 4000 A) 50 ms ±10 (NW DC)
80 ms ±10 (NW DC > 4000 A)

“Ready to close” contact PF


The “ready to close” position of the circuit breaker is indicated by a mechanical indicator
and a PF changeover contact. This signal indicates that all the following are valid:
b the circuit breaker is in the OFF position
b the spring mechanism is charged
b a maintained opening order is not present:
XF and MX voltage releases. v MX energised
v fault trip
v remote tripping second MX or MN
v device not completely racked in
PB100818-16R.eps

v device locked in OFF position


v device interlocked with a second device.

Characteristics
Supplied as standard -
Maximum number 1
Breaking capacity Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 5
AC12/DC12
480 5
690 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
“Ready to close” contacts PF.
250 0.15
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15

A-69

220EN_Catalogue.indb 69 25/11/2013 14:56:43


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Electrical closing pushbutton BPFE


Located on the front panel, this pushbutton carries out electrical closing of the circuit
breaker. It is generally associated with the transparent cover that protects access to
the closing pushbutton.
Electrical closing via the BPFE pushbutton takes into account all the safety functions
that are part of the control/monitoring system of the installation.
The BPFE connects to the closing release XF in place of the COM module.
The COM module is incompatible with this option.
Different types of voltage exist and the XF electromagnet is compulsary if the BPFE
option is selected.

DB402622.eps

Remote reset after fault trip


Electrical reset after fault trip RES
Following tripping, this function resets the “fault trip” indication contacts SDE
and the mechanical indicator and enables circuit breaker closing.
Power supply: 110 / 130 V AC and 200 / 240 V AC.
The use of XF closing release is compulsory with this option.
DB402623.eps

Automatic reset after fault trip RAR


Following tripping, a reset of the mechanical indicator (reset button) is no longer
required to enable circuit-breaker closing. The mechanical (reset button) and
electrical SDE indications remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed.
The use of XF closing release is compulsory with this option.

A-70

220EN_Catalogue.indb 70 25/11/2013 14:56:44


Remote operation: remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
PB104369A-68R.eps

b a shunt release second MX


b or an undervoltage release MN
b or a delayed undervoltage release MNR: (MN + delay unit).
These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function

DB402625.eps

DB402626.eps
DB402624.eps

Voltage releases second MX


PB100809-16R.eps

When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the second MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF
position.

Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 80 ms) hold: 4.5
MX or MN voltage release. Circuit-breaker response time at Un 50 ms ±10

Instantaneous voltage releases MN


The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on
the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-
breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to
85 % of its rated value.

Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
MN consumption with delay unit pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response time at Un 90 ms ±5

MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
VAC 50-60 Hz/DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay unit alone (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

A-71

220EN_Catalogue.indb 71 25/11/2013 14:56:45


Functions Electrical and mechanical
and characteristics
accessories
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC

Shields, blanking plates, counters


Auxiliary terminal shield CB
DB124953.eps

Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.

Operation counter CDM


PB104382-32R.eps

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front
panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.

Escutcheon CDP
DB101173.eps

Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP 40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30) .
It is available in fixed and drawout versions.

Blanking plate OP for escutcheon


Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet
equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
drawout devices.

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon


Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by
a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP 54, IK10. It adapts to drawout
devices.

Escutcheon CDP with blanking plate.


PB100776-42R.eps

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon.

Grounding kit KMT


DB414776.eps

This option allows the grounding of the breaker mechanism while the front cover is
removed. The grounding is made via the chassis for the drawout version and via the
fixation side plate for the fixed version.

Grounding kit KMT.

A-72

220EN_Catalogue.indb 72 25/11/2013 14:56:46


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Installation recommendations
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1

Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC


Installation in switchboards B-2
Power connections B-3
Safety clearances, minimum distances and insulation of live parts B-5
Temperature derating B-6
Characteristics of circuit breakers with parallel connection of poles B-7

Compact NSX DC PV
Safety clearances and minimum distances B-8
Temperature derating B-10
Power dissipation / Resistance B-11

Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV


Installation in switchboard B-12
Door interlock B-13
Cable-type door interlock - Connection of MN, MX and XF voltage releases B-14
Power connection B-15
Busbar sizing B-18
Temperature derating - Power dissipation and input/output resistance B-19
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order form F-1

B-1

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:56:46


2.5

Installation Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC


recommendations
Installation in switchboards

Possible mounting positions


For fixed or withdrawable circuit breakers
Fig. A Fig. B

DB413249.eps

DB413250.eps
Fig. C Fig. D
DB413251.eps

DB413252.eps

Fig. E
DB413253.eps

Possible supports
For fixed or withdrawable circuit breakers
On a plain mounting plate On a slotted mounting plate
DB413249.eps

DB413254.eps

On rails
DB413255.eps

B-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:56:49


Power connections

Electrodynamic forces on the conductors


DB402627.eps

The circuit breakers can be connected with copper, tinned copper or tinned
aluminum conductors (rigid or flexible bars, cables).
In the event of a short-circuit, electrodynamic forces will be exerted on the
conductors.
They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place using supports.
Electrical connection points on all types of devices (contactors, circuit breakers, etc.)
should not be used for mechanical support.

Ties for flexible bars and cables


The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the
prospective short-circuit current.
The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm.

Type of Maximum distance Short-circuit current


tie between ties (mm) (kA rms)
“PANDUIT” type ties 200 10
Width: 4.5 mm 100 14
Max. load: 22 kg
50 19
White
“SAREL” type ties 350 21
Width: 9 mm 200 27
Max. load: 90 kg
100 36
Black
Double ties 70 45
50 100
Note: for 50 mm² cables, use the 9 mm wide ties.

Weights
Type Circuit Plug-in Chassis Motor
breaker base mechanism
NSX100N/H DC 1P/1D 0.5 - - -
2P/2D 1.45 - - -
NSX100 DC 3P/3D 1.79 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX160N/H DC 1P/1D 0.5 - - -
2P/2D 1.45 - - -
NSX160N DC 3P/3D 1.85 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX250 DC 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX400/630 DC 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 2.8

B-3

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:56:50


Installation Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC
recommendations
Power connections

Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs


DB112168.eps

NSX100/160/250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Bars L (mm) y 25 y 32

DB115656.eps
I (mm) d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) y 10 y 15
Ø
400 e (mm) y6 3 y e y 10
d Ø (mm) 8.5 10.5
I
L Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 32
L
Ø (mm) 8.5 10.5
e Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 15 50
Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 20
(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base.

Connection of bare cables


DB115659.eps

DB115660.eps

NSX100 to 250 DC

DB111327.eps
DB112315.eps

Cable connector. Distribution connector.

Cable Steel Aluminium


connector y 160 A y 250 A
L (mm) 20 20
DB104660.eps

(1)
S (mm²) Cu/Al 1.5... 95 10... 16 25... 35 50...185
150 max. flexible
Tightening 12 15 20 26
torque (Nm)
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm²) Cu/Al 1.5... 6 (1) 8... 35
Tightening 4 6
torque (Nm)
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.

NSX400 to 630 DC
DB111326.eps
DB112316.eps

Cable connector. Distribution connector.

Cable connector 2-cable connector


L (mm) 20 30 or 60
DB104660.eps

S (mm²) Cu/Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid


240 max. flexible 240 max. flexible
Tightening 31 31
torque (Nm)

B-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:56:52


Safety clearances, minimum distances
and insulation of live parts

When installing a Compact NSX100 to 630 DC circuit breaker, minimum distances


(safety clearances) must be maintained between the device and panels, bars and
other protection devices installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the
ultimate breaking capacity, are defined by tests carried out in accordance with
standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
b use insulated bars for circuit breaker connections
b block off the busbars using insulating screens.
Terminal shields, interphase barriers and the insulation kit are recommended and
may be mandatory depending on the utilisation voltage and the type of installation
(fixed, withdrawable).

Minimal distance between two Minimal distance between the circuit


adjacent circuit breakers breaker and front or rear panels

DB402630.eps
DB402628.eps

A1
A2

Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and top, bottom or side panels
DB402629.eps

DB413245.eps

DB413246.eps
D1
D1

Devices with long or short terminal shields.

Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars or Bare sheetmetal


painted sheet metal
Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) B

NSX100-250 DC U y 250 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
U y 500 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U y 750 V 0 30 (4) 30 (4) 20 (1) 35 (4) 35 (4) 0 40 (4) 0
NSX400-630 DC U y 250 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0
U y 500 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0
U y 750 V 0 30 (4) 30 (4) 20 (1) 100 (4) 100 (4) 0 40 (4) 0
(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.
(2) For Compact NSX DC with long or short terminal shields.
(3) For Compact NSX DC without terminal shields.
(4) For voltage > 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory. The length of terminal shields (long or short terminal shields) should be considered.
The mandatory distances when installing Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the
interphase barriers.

B-5

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:56:54


Installation Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC
recommendations
Temperature derating

These values are valid for fixed and withdrawable When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 °C, overload-protection
circuit breakers with or without terminal shields. characteristics are slightly modified.
To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use the values of the current
indicated in the table below, corrected to take into account the ambient temperature.

Compact NSX DC temperature derating


NSX DC configuration Type of trip Rating In (A) for a given temperature
unit Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient
temp. 40 °C temp. 45 °C temp. 50 °C temp. 55 °C temp. 60 °C temp. 65 °C temp. 70 °C
NSX100 DC 1/2P TM16D 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
1P 250 V - 2P 500 V TM25D 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
TM32D 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
TM40D 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
TM50D 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
TM63D 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
TM80D 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
TM100D 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
NSX160 DC 1/2P TM125D 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
1P 250 V - 2P 500 V TM160D 160 156 152 147 144 140 136
NSX100 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM16D 16.8 16.4 16 15.5 15.2 14.7 14.5
TM25D 26.3 25.7 25.2 24.7 24.2 23.1 22.1
TM32D 33.6 33 32 31.5 31 30.5 30
TM40D 42 41 40 39 38 37 36
TM50D 53 51 50 49 48 47 46
TM63D 66 65 63 61 60 58 57
TM80DC 84 82 80 78 76 74 71
TM100DC 105 102 100 97 95 92 89
NSX160 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM125DC 131 128 125 122 119 114 111
TM160DC 168 164 160 154 151 147 143
NSX250 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM200DC 210 205 200 194 189 184 179
TM250DC 250 240 235 230 220 210 200
NSX100 DC 3/4P > 500 V TM16D 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
TM25D 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
TM32D 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
TM40D 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
TM50D 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
TM63D 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
TM80DC 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
TM100DC 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
NSX160 DC 3/4P > 500 V TM125DC 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
TM160DC 160 156 152 147 144 140 136
NSX250 DC > 500 V TM200DC 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
TM250DC 230 225 220 210 200 190 180
NSX400 DC y 500 V P1-P2 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
NSX400 DC > 500 V P1-P2 400 400 400 400 400 400 380
NSX630 DC y 500 V P1-P2-P3 550 530 510 490 470 440 420
NSX630 DC > 500 V P1-P2-P3 500 480 460 440 420 400 380

Example: Compact NSX100 DC equipped with a TM80DC trip unit has a rating of:
b 84 A at 40 °C
b 78 A at 55 °C.

B-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:56:54


Characteristics of circuit breakers with
parallel connection of poles

When poles are connected in parallel,the trip unit corresponding to


the maximum circuit breaker rating is never used, for safety reasons
related to temperature rise.The heating conditions are modified.The
table opposite indicates the new thermal ratings that should be used
for 2P, 3P and 4P circuit breakers.
Type of Pole Type of Equivalent Magnetic Type of Pole Type of trip Equivalent Magnetic
circuit connections trip unit rated threshold circuit connections unit rated threshold
breaker current (1) Im (A) breaker current (1) Im (A) ±20
In (A) at ±20 % In (A) at %
40 °C 40 °C
NSX100 DC NSX160 DC
NSX100 DC 2P in parallel TM16D 40 520 NSX160 DC 2P in parallel TM125D 313 2400
2-pole TM25D 63 800 2-pole
TM32D 80 800 NSX160 DC 3P in parallel TM100DC 360 2400
TM40D 100 1400 3-pole TM125DC 450 3750
TM50D 125 1400 TM125G 450 1560
TM63D 158 1400 TM160G 576 1560
See TM80D 200 1600 NSX160 DC 4P in parallel TM100DC 460 3200
4-pole TM125DC 575 5000
example 2
(see page TM125G 575 2080
A-5) TM160G 736 2080
2x2P (in TM100DC 230 1600
NSX100 DC 3P in parallel TM16D 58 780 parallel) in
3-pole See TM125DC 288 2500
TM25D 90 1200 series
example 1 TM125G 288 1040
TM32D 115 1650 TM160G 368 1040
(see page
TM40D 144 2100 A-5)
TM50D 180 2100 NSX250 DC
TM63D 227 2100 NSX250 DC 2P in parallel TM160DC 400 2500
3-pole TM200DC 500 2000 to 4000
TM80DC 288 2400
TM16G 58 240 NSX250 DC 3P in parallel TM160DC 576 3750
3-pole TM200DC 720 3000 to 6000
TM25G 90 300
TM40G 144 300 TM200G 720 1560
TM63G 227 450 TM250G 900 1875
TM80G 288 750 NSX250 DC 4P in parallel TM160DC 736 5000
4-pole TM200DC 920 4000 to 8000
TM100G 360 1200
NSX100 DC 4P in parallel TM16D 74 1040 TM200G 920 2080
4-pole TM25D 115 1600 TM250G 1150 2500
TM32D 147 2200 2x2P (in TM160DC 368 2500
parallel) TM200DC 460 2000 to 4000
TM40D 184 2800
in series
TM50D 230 2800 TM200G 460 1040
TM63D 290 2800 TM250G 575 1250
NSX400 DC
TM80DC 368 3200
NSX400 DC 2P in parallel MP1 640 1600 to 3200
TM16G 74 320
3-pole MP2 640 2500 to 5000
TM25G 115 400
NSX400 DC 3P in parallel MP1 960 2400 to 4800
TM40G 184 400
3-pole MP2 960 3750 to 7500
TM63G 290 600
NSX400 DC 4P in parallel MP1 1280 3200 to 6400
TM80G 368 1000
4-pole MP2 1280 5000 to 10000
TM100G 460 1600
2x2P (in MP1 640 1600 to 3200
2 x 2P (in TM16D 37 520
parallel) MP2 640 2500 to 5000
parallel) TM25D 58 800 in series
in series
TM32D 74 1100 NSX630 DC
TM40D 46 1400 NSX630 DC 2P in parallel MP1 1000 1600 to 3200
TM50D 115 1400 3-pole MP2 1000 2500 to 5000
TM63D 145 1400 MP3 1000 4000 to 8000
TM80DC 184 1600 NSX630 DC 3P in parallel MP1 1500 2400 to 4800
TM16G 37 160 3-pole MP2 1500 3750 to 7500
TM25G 58 200 MP3 1500 6000 to 12000
TM40G 46 200 NSX630 DC 4P in parallel MP1 2000 3200 to 6400
TM63G 145 300 4-pole MP2 2000 5000 to 10000
TM80G 184 500 MP3 2000 8000 to 16000
TM100G 230 800 2x2P (in MP1 1000 1600 to 3200
(1) Rated current of the assembly with the indicated pole connections. parallel) MP2 1000 2500 to 50000
in series
MP3 1000 4000 to 8000
Example : a Compact NSX100 DC 4-pole circuit breaker with 4 poles in parallel, equipped with a TM63D trip unit:
b an equivalent rated current of 290 A
b a fixed magnetic threshold of 2800 A.
B-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:56:55


Installation Compact NSX DC PV
recommendations Safety clearances and minimum distances

Safety clearance using terminals shields


bb Terminal shields must be used with all DC PV circuit breakers when operating
at 1000 V AC.
bb Terminal shields can be used in option with DC PV switch-disconnectors
(U y 1000 V DC).
Minimal distance between two Minimal distance between the device
adjacent devices and panels
A1

DB413830.eps

DB415722.eps
D1

D3
C1

Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars or painted sheet metal


C1 D1 D3 A1
NSX80-500 TM DC PV 30 30 30 30
NSX100-500 NA DC PV 30 30 30 30
NSX630b-1600 NA DC PV 30 30 30 30

Minimal distance between the device and panels


C1 C2
DB416420.eps

0.8 min.
DB416421.eps
D1

Fiber
insulating
plate

Fiber
insulating
plate
D2

Dimensions (mm) C1 C2 D1 D2
NSX80 to 200 DC PV 13 13 13 13
NSX250 to 500 DC PV 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4

Note: the thermal behaviour of switchgear and enclosures warrants careful monitoring. PV generator boxes and array boxes are usually installed outdoors
and exposed to the elements. In the event of high ambient temperatures, high IP levels could reduce air flow and thermal power dissipation.
In addition, the way switchgear devices achieve high voltage operation - i.e. through the use of poles in series - increases their temperature. Special attention
should therefore be paid to the temperature of switchgear inside outdoor enclosures on the DC side.
Schneider Electric recommend to check the installation as per IEC 61439 or any other equivalent standard.

B-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:56:56


Safety clearance with interphase barriers
PB110838_71.eps

bb Interphase barriers can used only with DC PV switch-disconnectors


(U y 1000 V DC).
Minimal distance between Minimal distance Rear panel:
two adjacent devices between the device insulation screen
and panels mandatory
A1 Front

DB413832.eps

DB413833.eps

DB413834.eps
panel
D1/D2

Compact NSX200 NA DC PV
with short heatsinks and
interphase barriers.

D3 Insulating
C1 screen is
PB110839_69.eps

mandatory (1)

(1) Dimensions of the insulating screen are identical as for the circuit breaker (see page B-8).

Dimensions (mm) Insulation, painted sheet Sheetmetal


metal
C1 D1 D3 C1 D2 D3 A1
NSX100-200 NA DC PV 50 50 100 50 100 100 50
NSX400-500 NA DC PV 70 70 100 70 100 100 70
NSX630b-1600 NA DC PV 70 70 125 70 100 100 70

Compact NSX200 NA DC PV
with long heatsinks and
interphase barriers.

Note: the thermal behaviour of switchgear and enclosures warrants careful monitoring. PV generator boxes and array boxes are usually installed outdoors
and exposed to the elements. In the event of high ambient temperatures, high IP levels could reduce air flow and thermal power dissipation.
In addition, the way switchgear devices achieve high voltage operation - i.e. through the use of poles in series - increases their temperature. Special attention
should therefore be paid to the temperature of switchgear inside outdoor enclosures on the DC side.
Schneider Electric recommend to check the installation as per IEC 61439 or any other equivalent standard.

B-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:56:58


Installation
recommendations
Compact NSX DC PV
Temperature derating

Compact switch-disconnectors have been tested for


operation in industrial atmospheres. It is recommended that
the equipment be cooled or heated to the proper operating
temperature and kept free of excessive vibration and dust.
DC PV switch-disconnectors
Compact NSX NA DC PV
IP Bottom Bottom Top Top Top series Maximum current (A): Ith Cooper
interphase terminal interphase terminal connection cable
40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
barrier shield barrier shield section (1)
NSX100 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Short 2 x LV438328 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Cu 35 mm2
IP4X No LV429518 No LV438327 Short 2 x LV438328 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Cu 35 mm2
NSX160 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Short 2 x LV438328 160 160 160 160 160 155 145 Cu 70 mm2
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Long 2 x LV438339 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 Cu 70 mm2
IP4X No LV429518 No LV438327 Short 2 x LV438328 160 160 160 160 150 145 135 Cu 70 mm2
NSX200 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Short 2 x LV438328 200 195 190 180 170 160 150 Cu 95 mm2
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Long 2 x LV438339 200 200 200 200 195 185 170 Cu 95 mm2
IP4X No LV429518 No LV438327 Short 2 x LV438328 190 180 175 165 155 150 140 Cu 95 mm2
NSX400 NA DC PV 4P
IP3X No LV432594 No LV438337 LV438338 400 400 400 400 400 390 380 Cu 240 mm2
IP0 3 (LV432570) No 1 (LV429329) No LV438338 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Cu 240 mm2
NSX500 NA DC PV 4P
IP3X No LV432594 No LV438337 LV438338 500 500 490 470 450 435 420 Cu 2 x 150 mm2
IP0 3 (LV432570) No 1 (LV429329) No LV438338 500 500 500 500 500 500 480 Cu 2 x 150 mm2

DC PV overcurrent protection
Compact NSX TM DC PV
Maximum current (A): Ith Cooper
For Compact NSX the overload protection is calibrated 20 °C 25 °C 30 °C 35 °C 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
cable
section (1)
at 40 °C and for C60 DC PV at 20 °C. This means that
when the ambient temperature is less or greater than NSX80 TM DC PV
these temperatures, the Ir protection pickup is slightly 88 86 84 82 80 77 75 72 69 66 63 Cu 25 mm2
modified. NSX125 TM DC PV
b Temperature rise for Compact range have been 137.5 135 131 128 125 121 116 112 108 103 98 Cu 50 mm2
checked with terminal shields (mandatory) heatsink on NSX160 TM DC PV
top, four cables on bottom connections with section 176 172 168 164 160 153 147 142 136 130 124 Cu 70 mm2
and length according to IEC60947-1 Table 9. NSX200 TM DC PV
b Values in the tables are provided for vertical 194 189 183 178 172 167 161 155 149 142 136 Cu 95 mm2
mounting only. In case of horizontal mounting consult NSX250 TM DC PV
us. To obtain the tripping time for a given temperature: 302 295 288 280 250 143 235 228 220 210 197 Cu 120 mm2
v see the tripping curves for 20 or 40 °C NSX320 TM DC PV
v determine tripping times corresponding to the Ir 371 362 352 342 320 309 297 286 273 261 248 Cu 185 mm2
value (thermal setting on the device), corrected for the NSX400 TM DC PV
breaker ambient temperature as indicated in the tables 455 444 433 421 400 386 372 358 343 327 311 Cu 240 mm2
below. NSX500 TM DC PV
557 542 526 511 495 478 461 444 426 405 384 Cu 2x150 mm2
(1) Temperature rise have been checked with four cables on bottom connections with section and length according to IEC60947-1 Table 9
a. When used in array boxes, with short connection to string protections the cross section of the bars or cables shall have a higher cross section.
b. When cables have a cross section lower than the value indicated an additional 0.9 derating coefficient shall be applied.
Values in the tables are provided for vertical mounting only.

B-10
Power dissipation / Resistance

The values indicated in the tables opposite are


Compact NSX80 TM to 500 TM DC PV switch-disconnectors
typical values. Version Fixed device
TM
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W)
The value indicated in the table is the power R/pole P/pole
dissipated at IN, four-pole switchboard (these values NSX80 TM DC PV 1.23 7.87
can be higher than the power calculated on the NSX100 TM DC PV 0.72 7.20
basis of the pole resistance). Measurement and NSX125 TM DC PV 0.61 9.53
calculation of the dissipated power are carried out in NSX160 TM DC PV 0.46 11.78
compliance with the recommendations of Annex G NSX200 TM DC PV 0.39 15.60
of standard IEC 60947-2. NSX250 TM DC PV 0.33 20.63
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ) NSX320 TM DC PV 0.215 22.02
The value of the resistance per pole is provided as NSX400 TM DC PV 0.16 25.60
a general indication for a new device.
NSX500 TM DC PV 0.134 33.50
The value of the contact resistance must be
determined on the basis of the measured voltage
drop, in accordance with the manufacturer’s test Compact NSX630b NA to 1600 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors
procedure. Version Fixed device
NA
Note: this measurement is not sufficient to determine
R/pole P/pole
the quality of the contacts, i.e. the capacity of the circuit
breaker to carry its rated current. NSX630b NA DC PV 0.029 11.4
NSX800 NA DC PV 0.029 18.7
NSX1000 NA DC PV 0.030 29.7
NSX1250 NA DC PV 0.030 47.3
NSX1600 NA DC PV 0.033 74.0

Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV switch-disconnectors (1)


The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature.
For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections.
DC PV switch-disconnector
Compact NSX NA DC PV
IP Bottom Bottom Top Top Top series Maximum current (A): Ith Copper cable
interphase terminal interphase terminal connection section
barrier shield barrier shield 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
NSX630b NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 Cu 2 x 185 mm2
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 Cu 2 x 185 mm2
NSX800 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 Cu 2 x 240 mm2
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 Cu 2 x 240 mm2
NSX1000 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Bar Cu 2 x 60 x 5 mm
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Bar Cu 2 x 60 x 5 mm
NSX1250 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 1250 1250 1250 1250 1232 1169 1102 Bar Cu 2 x 80 x 5 mm
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1227 1157 Bar Cu 2 x 80 x 5 mm
NSX1600 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 1473 1428 1384 1338 1291 1243 1193 Bar Cu 2 x 100 x 5 mm
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 1500 1500 1500 1448 1397 1345 1291 Bar Cu 2 x 100 x 5 mm
(1) For a switch-disconnector mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected
switch-disconnector.

B-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:56:59


Installation Masterpact NW10 to NW40
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Installation in switchboard

Possible positions

DB402631.eps

DB402632.eps

DB402633.eps
Power supply
The plus and minus polarities (LINE + and LINE -) of the power supply must be
connected as indicated in the “Dimensions and connection” chapter.
DB402634.eps

Mounting the circuit-breaker


It is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformily over a rigid mounting
surface such as rails or a base plate.
This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm).
This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation
of the circuit breaker.
Masterpact devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special
brackets.
DB402635.eps

DB402636.eps

Mounting on rails.
DB402637.eps

Mounting with vertical brackets.

B-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:57:01


Door interlock

Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the craddle, Door interlock catch VPEC
this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when
the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position. Y

DB402638.eps
It the breaker is put in the “connected” position with the
door open, the door may be closed without having to
disconnect the circuit breaker.

Catch not supplied

Dimensions (mm)
Type DC (1) (2)
NW10-40 DC (versions C-D) 215 215
NW10-40 DC (version E) 330 215
Type DC PV (1) (2)
NW10-40 DC PV (version D) 215 215

Breaker in “connected” or “test” position


Door cannot be opened
DB402639.eps

Breaker in “disconnected” position


Door can be opened
DB402640.eps

Note:
The door interlock can either be mounted on the right side or
the left side of the breaker.
F : Datum.

B-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:57:02


Installation Masterpact NW10 to NW40
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Cable-type door interlock - Connection of
MN, MX and XF voltage releases
Cable-type door interlock IPA
This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.

DB402737.eps

DB402738.eps
DB402739.eps

Wiring of voltage releases


During pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low control
voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed by the voltage and the
cross-sectional area of cables.

Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter)


12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 1.5 mm²
MN U source 100 % - - 58 35 280 165
U source 85 % - - 16 10 75 45
MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 70 550 330
U source 85 % 10 6 75 44 350 210
Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires.

B-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:57:03


Power connection

Cable connections

DB402740.eps

DB402741.eps
If cables are used for the power connections, make
sure that they do not apply excessive mechanical
forces to the circuit breaker terminals.
For this, make the connections as follows:
bb extend the circuit breaker terminals using short bars
designed and installed according to the
recommendations for bar-type power connections:
vv for a single cable, use solution B opposite
vv for multiple cables, use solution C opposite.
bb in all cases, follow the general rules for connections
to busbars:
vv position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts
v the cables should firmly secured to the framework of
the switchboard E.
DB402742.eps

Busbar connections
DB402743.eps

DB402744.eps

The busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure that


the connection points are positioned on the terminals
before the bolts are inserted B
The connections are held by the support which is solidly
fixed to the framework of the switchboard, such that the
circuit breaker terminals do not have to support its
weight C. (This support should be placed close to the
terminals).
DB402745.eps

Electrodynamic stresses
The first busbar support or spacer shall be situated within a maximum distance from
the connection point of the breaker (see table below). This distance must be
respected so that the connection can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between
phases in the event of a short circuit.
Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the first busbar
support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective short-circuit current.
Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100
distance A (mm) 350 300 250 150 150

B-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:57:05


Installation Masterpact NW10 to NW40
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Power connection

Clamping
DB402746.eps

Correct clamping of busbars depends amongst other things, on the tightening


torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening
torques to be used are shown in the table below.
These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, class 8.8. The
same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French standard
NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1).
Examples

DB402747.eps

DB402748.eps

DB402749.eps
1 Terminal screw factory-tightened to 16 Nm.
2 Breaker terminal. Tightening torques
3 Busbar. Ø Ø Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque
4 Bolt. with flat washers or (Nm) with contact
Nominal (mm) Drilling (mm)
5 Washer. split lockwashers or serrated washers
6 Nut.
10 11 37.5 50

Busbar drilling
Examples
DB402750.eps

DB402751.eps

DB402752.eps

Isolation distance
DB402753.eps

Dimensions (mm)
Ui X mini
500 V DC 8 mm
900 V DC 14 mm

Busbar bending
When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below
(a smaller radius would cause cracks).
DB402754.eps

Dimensions (mm)
e Radius of curvature r
Min. Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20

B-16

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:57:07


Horizontal rear connection NW10 to NW20 DC - DC PV
DB402755.eps

DB402756.eps

DB402757.eps

DB402758.eps

DB402759.eps
DB402760.eps

Vertical rear connection NW10 to NW20 DC - DC PV


DB402761.eps

DB402762.eps

DB402763.eps

DB402764.eps
DB402765.eps

Vertical rear connection NW40 DC - DC PV


DB402766.eps
DB402767.eps

B-17

220EN_Catalogue.indb 17 25/11/2013 14:57:09


Installation Masterpact NW10 to NW40
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Busbar sizing

Rear horizontal connection


DB402768.eps

Basis of tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper.
Example
Conditions:
b drawout version
b horizontal busbars
b Ti: 50 °C
b service current: 2000 A.
Solution
For Ti = 50 °C, use an NW20 DC - DC PV which can be connected
with three 100 x 5 mm bars or two 80 x 10 mm bars.

Masterpact Maximum Ti: 40 °C Ti: 50 °C Ti: 60 °C


NW DC - DC PV service no. of bars no. of bars no. of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars
bars bars
NW10 DC 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NW20 DC 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
NW20 HADCD-PV 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot
replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.

Rear vertical connection


DB402769.eps

Basis of tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper.
Example
Conditions:
b fixed version
b vertical busbars
b Ti: 40 °C
b service current: 1000 A.
Solution
For Ti = 40 °C, use an NW10 DC - DC PV which can be connected
with two 50 x 5 mm bars or one 50 x 10 mm bar.

Masterpact Maximum Ti: 40 °C Ti: 50 °C Ti: 60 °C


NW DC - DC PV service no. of bars no. of bars no. of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars
bars bars
NW10 DC 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NW20 DC 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NW40 DC 4000 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10
NW20 HADCD-PV 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NW40 HADCD-PV 4000 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10
Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot
replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.

B-18

220EN_Catalogue.indb 18 25/11/2013 14:57:10


Temperature derating - Power dissipation
and input/output resistance
Temperature derating
The table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as
a function of the ambient temperature around the circuit breaker and the busbars.
For ambient temperatures greater than 60 °C, consult us.
Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.

Version Drawout device Fixed device


Connection Rear horizontal Rear vertical Rear horizontal Rear vertical
temp. Ti 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60
NW DC
NW10 Version C 1000 1000 1000 1000
Version D 1000 1000 1000 1000
Version E 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW20 Version C 2000 2000 2000 2000
Version D 2000 2000 2000 2000
Version E 2000 2000 2000 2000
NW40 Version C - 4000 - 4000
Version D - 4000 3900 3750 3600 - 4000
Version E - 4000 3800 3650 3500 - 4000
NW DC PV
NW20 Version D 2000 2000 2000 2000
NW40 Version D - 4000 3900 3750 3600 - 4000

Power dissipation and input/output resistance


Total power dissipation is the value measured at IN, for a 3 pole (version C, D (1))
or 4 pole (version E) breaker (values above the power P = 3RI²).

(1) DC PV version D only.

Version Drawout device Fixed device


Power dissipation (Watt) Power dissipation (Watt)
Version C D E C D E
NW10 DC 45 75 105 25 40 60
NW20 DC 135 230 330 90 160 235
NW40 DC 460 800 1150 360 580 850

Version Drawout device Fixed device


Power dissipation (Watt) Power dissipation (Watt)
Version D D
NW20 HADCD-PV 230 160
NW40 HADCD-PV 800 580

B-19

220EN_Catalogue.indb 19 25/11/2013 14:57:10


TOOLS

schneider-electric.com

This international site allows you


to access all the Schneider Electric
Solution and Product information via :
ppcomprehensive descriptions
pprange data sheets
ppa download area
ppproduct selectors
pp...
You can also access the information
dedicated to your business and get
in touch with your Schneider Electric
country support.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 20 25/11/2013 14:57:11


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Dimensions and connection
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1

Compact (fixed version) 1P-2P NSX100-NSX160 DC


Dimensions, mounting, cutout C-2

Dimensions and mounting


Compact NSX100 to 630 DC fixed version C-4
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC plug-in version C-6
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC withdrawable version C-8
Motor mechanism module for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-10
Direct rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-11
MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles
for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC fixed version C-12
Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-13

Front-panel accessories
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-14

Power connections
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC fixed version C-16
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs
to Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-20
Connection of bare cables to Compact NSX100 to 630 DC C-21

Compact (fixed version)


2P-3P-4P Parallel and series connection of poles
Compact NSX100 to NSX250 DC C-22
Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC C-23

Compact (withdraw. version) 3P-4P Parallel and series


connection of poles
Compact NSX100 to NSX250 DC C-24
Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC C-25

Compact (fixed version)


4P connection of poles, dimensions and mounting
Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC PV C-26

Compact (fixed version)


4P connection of poles, dimensions
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV C-27

Compact (fixed version)


4P front connection of poles, mounting
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV C-28

Compact (fixed version)


4P rear connection of poles, mounting
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV C-29

Masterpact (fixed device)


NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P), version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P) C-30
NW10 to 40 DC Version C C-31
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV Version D C-32
NW10 to 40 DC Version E C-33
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P) version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P) C-34
NW10 to 40 DC Version C C-35
NW10 to 40 DC Version E C-37
Accessories C-38
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order form F-1
C-1

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:57:13


Dimensions Compact (fixed version) 1P-2P
and connection
NSX100-NSX160 DC
Dimensions, mounting, cutout

Dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
DB402532.eps

DB402533.eps

DB402534.eps
X X X

Y Y

(a) Short terminal shields.


Z (b) Interphase barriers.

Mounting
On backplate
1 pole 2 poles
DB416364.eps

DB416365.eps

X X

Y Y
(c) For rear connection only.

On rails
1 pole 2 poles
DB402537.eps

DB402538.eps

X X

Y Y

C-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:57:16


Front-panel cutout
On backplate
DB402539.eps

DB416366.eps

DB416367.eps

DB416368.eps
X X X X

Y Y
Y

With escutcheon
DB416369.eps
DB402543.eps

X X

Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H
NSX100/160 DC 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5
Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5
NSX100/160 DC 161 94 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35
Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6
NSX100/160 DC 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29
Type R7 ØT ØT4 U
NSX100/160 DC 58 6 22 y 32

C-3

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:57:17


Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
fixed version

Dimensions 3P 4P
DB112061.eps

DB112062.eps

DB112063.eps

DB112064.eps
A4
A3
A A2
A1
X X X

A A2
A3
A4

C1 B B
C2 B1 B2
C3
Z Y Y

Interphase barriers. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).

Mounting NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 630 DC


On backplate 3P 3P 4P

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112065.eps

DB111411.eps

DB112067.eps
DB112066.eps

F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3

E4
X X X
E2
E1 E3

2 Ø6 Y ØT(1) Y 4 Ø6 Y 4 Ø6

(1) The ØT holes are required for rear connection only.

On rails 3P 3P 4P

F1 F1 F3
DB112068.eps

DB111412.eps

DB112069.eps

DB112070.eps

F2 F2 F2

X X X
E2

E1

2 Ø6 Y Y 4 Ø6 Y 4 Ø6

C-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:57:20


On DIN rail with adapter plate (NSX100 to 250 DC)
G4
DB112071.eps

DB112072.eps
G5

G3 X

G2
G1

Dimensions (mm)
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 B B1 B2 C1 C2 C3
NSX100/160/250 DC 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 52.5 105 140 81 86 126
NSX400/630 DC 127.5 255 142.5 200 237 70 140 185 95.5 110 168
Type E1 E2 F1 F2 F3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5
NSX100/160/250 DC 62.5 125 35 17.5 70 95 75 13.5 23 17.5
NSX400/630 DC 100 200 45 22.5 90 - - - - -

C-5

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:57:21


Dimensions Dimensions and mounting
and connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
plug-in version

Dimensions 3P 4P
M
DB112640.eps

DB112641.eps

DB112642.eps

DB112643.eps
N

A11

M A10
A A2
N A1
X X X

A A2
A10

A11

B B
27 B1 B2
45
D1 C3
Z Y Y

Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm)
Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.

Mounting
Through front panel (N) 3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 630 DC

F1 F1 F3
DB112648.eps

DB112649.eps

DB115637.eps

DB112650.eps

N F2 F2 F2

E10 E12 X X Y
X

E9 E11

F4 F4 F4 4 Ø6
2 Ø6 4 Ø6
F5 F5 F6
Y Y Y

C-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:57:22


On backplate (M) 3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)

F1 F3
DB112654.eps

DB112655.eps

DB112656.eps
F2 F2

E14 X X

E13

2 Ø6 4 Ø6
Y Y

Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112657.eps

DB112658.eps

DB112659.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3

E14 E16 X X

E13 E15

2 Ø6 ØT1(1) 4 Ø6
Y Y
(1) The ØT1 holes are required for rear connection only.

Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1
DB112660.eps

DB112661.eps

DB112662.eps

F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3

E14
E18 X
X

E13 E17

2 Ø6 ØT1(1) 4 Ø6
Y Y
(1) The ØT1 holes are required for rear connection only.

On rails 3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112663.eps

DB112664.eps

DB112665.eps

F9 F9

U
X X
E20
E19

2 Ø6 4 Ø6
Y Y

Type A A1 A2 A10 A11 B B1 B2 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15


NSX100/160/250 DC 80.5 161 94 175 210 52.5 105 140 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 79
NSX400/630 DC 127.5 255 142.5 244 281 70 140 185 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250 126
Type E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 ØT1 U
NSX100/160/250 DC 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 54.5 109 144 70 105 35 24 y 32
NSX400/630 DC 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 71.5 143 188 100 145 50 33 y 35

C-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:57:25


Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
withdrawable version

Dimensions 3P 4P
M
DB112644.eps

DB112645.eps

DB112646.eps

DB112647.eps
N

A10
M A12 A11
N
X X X

A13 A11
A10

B3 B3
27 B4 B6
45 B5 B7
D1 C3 Y Y
Z

M
DB112681.eps

C3 32
Z
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields.
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.

Mounting
Through front panel (N) 3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 630 DC

F1 F1 F3
DB112651.eps

DB112652.eps

DB115638.eps

DB112653.eps

N
F2 F2 F2

3 E10 E12 X X X

E9 E11

F10 F10 4 Ø6 F10 4 Ø6


2 Ø6
F11 F11 F12
Y Y Y

C-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:57:27


On backplate (M) 3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)

F1
DB112682.eps

DB112655.eps

DB112656.eps
F3
F2 F2

E14 X X

E13

2 Ø6 4 Ø6
Y Y

Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112683.eps

DB112658.eps

DB112659.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3

E14 E16 X X

E13 E15

2 Ø6 ØT1(1) 4 Ø6
Y Y
(1) The ØT1 holes are required for rear connection only.

Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1
DB112684.eps

DB112661.eps

DB112662.eps

F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3

E14
E18 X
X

E13 E17

2 Ø6 ØT1(1) 4 Ø6
Y Y

(1) The ØT1 holes are required for rear connection only.

On rails 3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112685.eps

DB112664.eps

DB112665.eps

F9 F9

U
X X
E20
E19

2 Ø6 4 Ø6
Y Y

Type A10 A11 A12 A13 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14
NSX100/160/250 DC 175 210 106.5 103.5 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155
NSX400/630 DC 244 281 140 140 110 220 250 265 295 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250
Type E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 ØT1 U
NSX100/160/250 DC 79 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 70 105 35 74 148 183 24 y 32
NSX400/630 DC 126 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 100 145 50 91.5 183 228 33 y 35

C-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:57:28


Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection Motor mechanism module
for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC

Dimensions 3P 4P
Fixed circuit breaker
DB112693.eps

DB112694.eps

DB112695.eps

DB112696.eps
A17
A15 X X X
A14 A16
Ø5...8

B8 B8
C4
B9 B9
C5/C6
B B
B1 B2

Y Y
Z
C5: without keylock
C6: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112697.eps

DB112698.eps

N N

Ø5...8

27
45
D1 C5

Z
Withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB112699.eps

DB112700.eps

N N

X
Ø5...8

27
45
D1 C5 32
Z

Type A14 A15 A16 A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 C4 C5 C6 D1


NSX100/160/250 DC 27.5 73 34.5 62.5 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 143 182 209.5 75
NSX400/630 DC 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 256 258 100

C-10

220EN_Catalogue.indb 10 25/11/2013 14:57:30


Direct rotary handle
for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC

Dimensions 3P 4P
Fixed circuit breaker
B10
DB112701.eps

DB112702.eps

DB112703.eps

DB112704.eps
I
60°
A15 X X X
60°
A14 O
A18

B8 B8
B9 B9
C7
B B
C8/C9 B1 B2
Z Y Y

C8: without keylock


C9: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112705.eps

DB112706.eps

N N

27
45
D1 C8
Z

Withdrawable circuit breaker


M M
DB112708.eps
DB112707.eps

N N

27
45
D1 C8 32

Type A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 C8 C9 D1


NSX100/160/250 DC 27.5 73 9 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 9.25 121 155 164 75
NSX400/630 DC 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 179 188 100

C-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:57:31


Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary
handles for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
fixed version

Dimensions
MCC type direct rotary handle
DB112712.eps

DB112713.eps

DB112714.eps
A18
A20
Ø5...
8
X X
A19

1...3 max.

P1 B10
B11
Z B12
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112715.eps

DB112716.eps

DB112717.eps
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
N
A18 A22
X X
8
Ø5...

push
to
trip
A21

1...3 max.

P2 B10
B13
B14
Z Y

Front-panel cutout NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC


MCC type direct rotary handle
DB112712.eps

DB111413.eps

DB111414.eps

100 145
Ø5...
8
X X

41 51

50
75
100
145
Y
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112715.eps

DB111415.eps

DB111416.eps

N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac

150
119
8
Ø5...

push
to
trip
X X

50.5 50.4

Type A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 B10


NSX100/160/250 DC 9 60 120 65 130 9.25
NSX400/630 DC 24.6 83 160 82 164 5 68.75
80
Type B11 B12 B13 B14 P1 P2 119
150
NSX100/160/250 DC 69 120 65 130 125 135 Y
Y
NSX400/630 DC 85 160 82 164 149 158

C-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:57:33


Extended rotary handle
for Compact NSX100 to 630 DC

Dimensions
Fixed and plug-in circuit breakers
M M
DB112709.eps

DB112710.eps
N N

10
X

Cutout for shaft (mm)


Type R1
NSX100/160/250 DC min. 171
27 max. 600
45
NSX400/630 DC min. 195
D1 R1 47 max. 600
Z
Withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB111417.eps

DB112711.eps

N N

Cutout for shaft (mm)


Type R2
27 NSX100/160/250 DC min. 248
45 max. 600
D1 R2 47 NSX400/630 DC min. 272
max. 600
Z

Dimensions and front-panel cutout


DB111418.eps

DB111419.eps

60° 45° Ø50


A18 A18
75 X X
37.5
60° 2 Ø4.2
36
72
B10
Type A18 B10 D1 B10
37.5
Y
NSX100/160/250 DC 9 9.25 75
75
NSX400/630 DC 24.6 5 100
Y

C-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:57:35


Dimensions and Front-panel accessories
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC

IP30 front-panel escutcheons


For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module

DB114998.eps

DB114999.eps

DB115000.eps
DB416370.eps

X X
A

B 4
Y

For toggle or rotary handle with access to trip unit


DB115001.eps

DB115002.eps

DB115003.eps

DB115004.eps
X X
A1

B 4
Y

IP40 front-panel escutcheons


For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module and protection collar
DB115064.eps

DB115010.eps

DB115011.eps

DB115012.eps
X A3 X
A2

B1 3.5 6.5
Y

Protection collars for IP40 front-panel escutcheons


For toggle
DB115021.eps

DB115022.eps

DB115024.eps
DB115023.eps

X X
A4

B2 35
Y

C-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:57:38


IP43 toggle cover
DB115030.eps

DB115031.eps

DB115032.eps

DB115120.eps
X
A5

B3 C
Y

Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 C
NSX100/160/250 DC 113 138 114 101 73 85 113 157 91 103 40
NSX400/630 DC 163 211 164 151 122.5 138 163 189 122.5 138 60

C-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:57:38


Dimensions and Power connections
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
fixed version

Front connection without accessories


NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Z Z
DB115444.eps

DB115445.eps

DB115446.eps
10.5 14

70 113.5

X X
Cables with lugs/bars Bars/cables with lugs

Connection with accessories


Long and short rear connectors
NSX100 to 250 DC
Z
DB115447.eps

DB416576.eps

43 for short RC
88 for long RC

10 ∅8.6
13
18

70
6 ∅20
X

NSX400/630 DC
Z
DB416577.eps

50 for short RC
115 for long RC
15 ∅13 ∅23.2

14
30

113.5
8
X

C-16

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:57:40


Connection with accessories (cont.)
Bare-cable connectors
NSX100 to 250 DC

DB416579.eps
DB115450.eps

Z Z

DB416578.eps
63

22

70 70

X X
DB115453.eps

NSX400/630 DC

DB416581.eps
Z Z
DB416580.eps

46.5
14

113.5 113.5

X X

Distribution connectors (for NSX100 to 250 DC only)


X
DB115456.eps

DB416582.eps

70

41

64.5
66.5 (a)
(a) NSX250 DC. Z
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only)
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Z
DB115458.eps

DB403551.eps

DB403552.eps

Z
37.5 61 8
39.5 (b) 4

20.5 34

70 113.5

X X
(b) NSX250 DC.
Straight terminal extensions (for NSX100 to 250 DC only)
4
DB115461.eps

DB403553.eps

41
30

70

C-17

220EN_Catalogue.indb 17 25/11/2013 14:57:43


Dimensions and Power connections
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
fixed version

Connection with accessories (cont.)


Edgewise terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Z
DB115463.eps

DB115464.eps

DB115465.eps
30
Z
23.5

58
53
42 8 42

70 113.5

4
X X

45° terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC


Z
DB115466.eps

DB115467.eps

DB115468.eps
Z 10
13.5

61.5
40 48
31 8
4

70 113.5

X X

Double-L terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC


Z
DB115469.eps

DB115470.eps

45

4
46
35

70

C-18

220EN_Catalogue.indb 18 25/11/2013 14:57:45


Connection with accessories (cont.)
Spreaders 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC
E1 E3
DB115471.eps

DB115472.eps

DB115473.eps

DB115474.eps
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 C3

F1

X X X

NSX400/630 DC
Y Y
C4

Type C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100/160 DC 23.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX250 DC 25.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX400/630 DC - 44 135 52.5 187.5 152.5 15
170 70 240 166 15

One-piece spreader (for NSX100 to 250 only)


98
DB115475.eps

DB115477.eps

180.5
DB115476.eps

26
140
45 45 45

130
113.5

X
X

Y
Z

C-19

220EN_Catalogue.indb 19 25/11/2013 14:57:46


Dimensions and Power connections
connection Connection of insulated bars or cables
with lugs to Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
DB112168.eps

DB115653.eps
Direct connection to NSX100 to 630 DC
Dimensions NSX100 DC NSX160/250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Ø
400 Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
d I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
I
d (mm) y 10 y 10 y 15
L
e (mm) y6 y6 3 y e y 10
e
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Bar.
Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
DB115654.eps

Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5


Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
Ø Torque (Nm) (2) 5/5 5/5 20/11
Torque (Nm) (3) 8 8 20
(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for lugs or bars.
L
(2) Tightening torque on fixed devices for rear connectors//tightening torque on plug-in or
Lug. withdrawable devices for power connectors.
(3) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for terminal extensions.

Accessories for NSX100 to 250 DC Connection with accessories to NSX100 to 250 DC (IEC 228)
Straight terminal Double-L terminal Pole pitch
extensions extensions Without spreaders 35 mm
DB112172.eps

DB112176.eps

With spreaders 45 mm
Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
NSX100 DC NSX160/250 DC
Tinned copper Tinned copper Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25
DB115656.eps

l (mm) 20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
Spreaders: d (mm) y 10 y 10
separate parts One-piece spreader 400 Ø
e (mm) y6 y6
DB112177.eps

DB416402.eps

d Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5


I
L Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25
L
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5
e Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15
Tinned copper Torque (Nm) (2) 5 5
For U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit is not (1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
compatible with spreaders made up of separate parts. (2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
Spreaders and straight, right-angle, 45°, double-L and edgewise terminal extensions
are supplied with flexible interphase barriers.
Accessories for NSX400 and 630 DC
Spreaders made up of separate parts for 52.5 and
70 mm pitch Connection with accessories to NSX400 DC and 630 DC
(IEC 228)
DB115657.eps

Pole pitch
Without spreaders 45 mm
With spreaders 52.5 or 70 mm
Tinned copper Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions
For U > 600 V, use of the 52.5 mm pitch spreaders Bars L (mm) y 40 y 32
DB115656.eps

requires a specific insulation kit. l (mm) d + 15 30 y I y 34


The 70 mm pitch spreaders may not be used. d (mm) y 20 y 15
400 Ø
e (mm) 3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
Accessories for NSX100 to 630 DC I
d Ø (mm) 12.5 10.5
Right-angle terminal Edgewise terminal L Lugs L (mm) y 40 y 32
L
extensions extensions Ø (mm) 12.5 10.5
e Torque (Nm) (1) 50 50
DB112175.eps
DB112173.eps

Torque (Nm) (2) 20 20


(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
(2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
Tinned copper Tinned copper
To be mounted on upstream
Spreaders and right-angle, 45° and edgewise terminal extensions are supplied with
side. flexible interphase barriers.
DB115658.eps

45° terminal extensions


DB112174.eps

Tinned copper

Mounting detail: 2 cables with lugs.

C-20

220EN_Catalogue.indb 20 25/11/2013 14:57:52


Connection of bare cables
to Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
DB115659.eps

DB115660.eps
Connection for NSX100 to 250 DC

DB112315.eps

DB112317.eps

DB111327.eps
1-cable 2-cable Distribution connector
connector connector

1-cable connector Steel Aluminium


y 160 A y 250 A
L (mm) 25 25

DB115663.eps
S (mm²) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 25 to 50 70 to 95 120 to 185
150 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 12 20 26 26
2-cable connector
S
L (mm) 25 or 50
S (mm²) Cu / Al 2 x 50 to 2 x 120
Torque (Nm) 22
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm²) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35
Torque (Nm) 4 6
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm², connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrules.

Connection for NSX400 and 630 DC


DB112316.eps

DB111326.eps

1-cable connector 2-cable connector

1-cable connector 2-cable connector


L (mm) 30 30 or 60
DB115663.eps

S (mm²) Cu / Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 35 to 2 x 240 rigid


240 max. flex. 240 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 31 31

Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses


Compact NSX DC circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper,
tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables).
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on
the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and held in place by
supports.
Electrical connection points on switchgear devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be
made of non-magnetic material.

C-21

220EN_Catalogue.indb 21 25/11/2013 14:57:53


Dimensions Compact (fixed version)
and connection
2P-3P-4P Parallel and series
connection of poles
Compact NSX100 to NSX250 DC
2P fixed version (Compact NSX100-160 N/H DC) - 3P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC)
With series connections
2 poles 3 poles
DB402545.eps

X X X X X X X X X

Y Y Y

Z Y Y Y Y Y

With parallel connections


2 poles 3 poles
DB402546.eps

DB402547.eps

X X X

Z
Y Y

4P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC)


With series connections
DB402548.eps

X X X X X

Y
Y

Z Y Y

With parallel connections


2 x 2 poles 4 poles
Connection to be made by customer
DB402546.eps

DB402549.eps

DB402550.eps

DB402551.eps

X X
X

Y
Y
Z

C-22

220EN_Catalogue.indb 22 25/11/2013 14:57:56


Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC
3P fixed version (Compact NSX400-630 DC)
With series connections
DB402552.eps

X X X X X X X

Y Y

Z Y Y Y Y

With parallel connections


Connection to be made by customer
DB402553.eps

DB402554.eps

DB402555.eps

X X

Y
Z

4P fixed version (Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC)


With series connections
DB402556.eps

X
X X X X

Y
Z Y Y

With parallel connections


2 x 2 poles 4 poles
DB402557.eps

DB402558.eps

Connection to be made by customer


DB402559.eps

DB402560.eps

X X X

Y Y
Z

C-23

220EN_Catalogue.indb 23 25/11/2013 14:58:00


Dimensions Compact (withdraw. version)
and connection
3P-4P Parallel and series
connection of poles
Compact NSX100 to NSX250 DC
3P withdrawable version
Connections mounted with heat sink directed outwards
DB402561.eps

DB402562.eps

DB402563.eps
Z
Y

X X
X X

Z
Y

Connections mounted with heat sink directed inwards


DB402564.eps

DB402565.eps

DB402566.eps
Y Z

X X
X X

Y Z

4P withdrawable version
Connections mounted with heat sink directed outwards
DB402568.eps

DB402569.eps
DB402567.eps

Y Z

X X
X X

Z
Y

Connections mounted with heat sink directed inwards


DB402570.eps

DB402571.eps

DB402572.eps

Y Z

X X
X X

Y Z

C-24

220EN_Catalogue.indb 24 25/11/2013 14:58:03


Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC
3P withdrawable version
Connections mounted with heat sink directed outwards
DB402573.eps

DB402574.eps

DB402575.eps
Y Z

X X
X X

Z
Y

Connections mounted with heat sink directed inwards


DB402576.eps

DB402577.eps

DB402578.eps
Y Z

X X
X X

Y Z

4P withdrawable version
Connections mounted with heat sink directed outwards
DB402579.eps

DB402580.eps

DB402581.eps

Y Z

X X
X X

Y Z

Connections mounted with heat sink directed inwards


DB402582.eps

DB402583.eps

DB402584.eps

Y Z

X X
X X

Y
Z

C-25

220EN_Catalogue.indb 25 25/11/2013 14:58:06


1.0

Dimensions Compact (fixed version)


and connection
4P connection of poles,
dimensions and mounting
Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC PV
4P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC PV)
With series connections

DB413515.eps
12.5 47.5
DB416371.eps

55 60

DB415913.eps
Ø6
190.5

X X 125 X

70 625

Y
Ø22
17.5

Z 70
35 35 35
Y

4P fixed version (Compact NSX400-630 DC PV)


With series connections
15 60
DB413516.eps

67
DB416372.eps

75
DB415914.eps

356 Ø6
X X X
200

113.5
100

Ø32 22.5
Y
90
45 45 45
Z Y

Dimensions
DB112061R.eps

DB416373.eps

DB112064R.eps

A4
A3
A
A1
X X

A A2
A3
A4

C1 B
C2
B2
C3
Z Y

Interphase barriers. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm
Long terminal shields. pitch: B2 = 210 mm).

Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 B B2 C1 C2 C3
NSX100/160/250 DC PV 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 52.5 140 81 86 126
NSX400/630 DC PV 127.5 255 142.5 240 237 70 185 95.5 110 168

C-26 Version : 1.0 21/11/2013 220E3105

220EN_Catalogue.indb 26 25/11/2013 14:58:09


Compact (fixed version)
4P connection of poles,
dimensions
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV
Electrical control
Front connection
DB415915.eps

DB415753.eps
(1)

(2)
254
248.5
163.5 240

X 210 327
200
X

100

254

Z
107.5 169.5 99.5
175.5 Y
182
(1) With terminal shield.
(2) With phase separator.
Rear connection
DB415755.eps

X X
DB415754.eps

100
123

107.5 35
175.5 70
182 169.5 99.5
F
Z

Front-panel cutouts
Door cutout
A
DB415756.eps

150 mini
DB415916.eps

(A)
(1) (2)

Y
264 mini 194 mini

X X 216 (1)
266 (2)

108 (1)
133 (2)

194 (1) 97 (1)


F
244 (2) 122 (2)
Z
F : Datum.
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.

220E3105 Version : 1.0 21/11/2013 C-27

220EN_Catalogue.indb 27 25/11/2013 14:58:11


Dimensions
and connection
Compact (fixed version)
4P front connection of poles,
mounting
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV
On backplate
Y

DB415758.eps
4 Ø6.5

X
200

100

169.5 99.5

On rails
DB415759.eps

4 Ø6.5

X
200

100

169.5 99.5

Note: mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 4-pole device.
Z is the back plane of the device.

C-28 Version : 1.0 21/11/2013 220E3105

220EN_Catalogue.indb 28 25/11/2013 14:58:12


Compact (fixed version)
4P rear connection of poles,
mounting
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV
On backplate
Y

DB415760.eps
4 Ø6.5

X
200
75
60 100

4 R30

169.5 99.5

270
On rails
DB415761.eps

169.5 99.5

2 Ø6.5

100

107
117

3 Ø6.5
35
Y
70 70

Note: mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 4-pole device.
Z is the back plane of the device.

220E3105 Version : 1.0 21/11/2013 C-29

220EN_Catalogue.indb 29 25/11/2013 14:58:12


Dimensions Masterpact (fixed device)
and connection
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P),
version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P)
Device

DB402242.eps
DB402241.eps

X X

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

Y
DB402244.eps

X
DB402243.eps

Safety clearances Door cutout


DB402245.eps

DB402246.eps

DB402247.eps

Insulated Metal parts Energised


parts parts
A 0 0 100 Note:
B 0 0 60 (1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
F : Datum. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.

C-30

220EN_Catalogue.indb 30 25/11/2013 14:58:14


Masterpact

DB104832.eps
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version C
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB104808.eps

DB416092.eps

DB416093.eps
Y
X

Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB402252_55.eps

DB416094.eps

DB416095.eps
X Y
DB101282.eps

View A detail.

Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC) Detail


DB104816.eps

DB416096.eps

DB416097.eps

X Y
Db101314.eps

Note: View A detail.


Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

C-31

220EN_Catalogue.indb 31 25/11/2013 14:58:17


Dimensions Masterpact

DB104833.eps
and connection
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV
Version D
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB104818.eps

DB416098.eps

DB416099.eps
X

Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402264_55.eps

DB416100.eps

DB416101.eps
X
Y
DB101282.eps

View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402268_55.eps

DB416102.eps

DB416103.eps

Y
Db101314.eps

Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
View A detail.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

C-32

220EN_Catalogue.indb 32 25/11/2013 14:58:23


Masterpact

DB104835.eps
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version E
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail

DB416105.eps
DB402272_55.eps

DB416104.eps Y
X

Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB402276_55.eps

DB416107.eps
DB416106.eps

X Y
DB101282.eps

View A detail.

Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC) Detail


DB402280_55.eps

DB416108.eps

DB416109.eps

Y
Db101314.eps

Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. View A detail.

C-33

220EN_Catalogue.indb 33 25/11/2013 14:58:25


Dimensions Masterpact (drawout device)
and connection
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P)
version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P)
Device
DB416110.eps

DB416111.eps
Y

X X

(*) Drawout position.

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

X Y
DB416112.eps

DB416113.eps

Safety clearances Door cutout


Db101293.eps

Db101294.eps

DB416114.eps

Insulated Metal parts Energised


parts parts
A 0 0 0
Note:
B 0 0 60 (1) Without escutcheon
(2) With escutcheon
F : Datum. X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

C-34

220EN_Catalogue.indb 34 25/11/2013 14:58:27


Masterpact

DB104879.eps
(drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version C
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB402291_55.eps

DB416115.eps

DB416116.eps
Y

Db101278.eps
X

Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail


DB402295_55.eps

DB416117.eps

DB416118.eps

Y
X
DB101282.eps

View A detail.

Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC) Detail


DB104852.eps

DB416119.eps

DB416120.eps

Y
X
Db101314.eps

Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. View A detail.

C-35

220EN_Catalogue.indb 35 25/11/2013 14:58:29


Dimensions Masterpact

DB104880.eps
and connection
(drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV
Version D
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402303_55.eps

DB416121.eps

DB416122.eps
Y

Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB104859.eps

DB416123.eps

DB416124.eps

X
Y
DB101282.eps

View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402311_55.eps

DB416125.eps

DB416126.eps

Y
Db101314.eps

Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. View A detail.

C-36

220EN_Catalogue.indb 36 25/11/2013 14:58:31


Masterpact

DB104881.eps
(drawout device) 0
NW10 to 40 DC
Version E
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB402315_55.eps

DB416127.eps

DB416128.eps
X Y

Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB104871.eps

DB416129.eps

DB416130.eps

X Y
DB101282.eps

View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC) Detail
DB416131.eps
DB402323_55.eps

DB416132.eps

Y
Db101314.eps

Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. View A detail.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

C-37

220EN_Catalogue.indb 37 25/11/2013 14:58:33


Dimensions
and connection
Masterpact NW10 to 40
DC - DC PV
Accessories

Rear panel cutout (drawout device)


NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV
DB416133.eps

DB416134.eps
Y

X
X

F : Datum.

Escutcheon
Fixed device Drawout device
Y Y
DB416135.eps

DB416136.eps

X X

Connection of auxiliary wiring to terminal block


DB101367.eps

Db101368.eps

One conductor only per connection point.

C-38

220EN_Catalogue.indb 38 25/11/2013 14:58:35


Delay unit for MN release
Db101375.eps

DB115891.eps
6
3 4 5

S
3 6

MN
UVR
30 V
100/1C
AC/D

“Chassis” communication module


Modbus
Db101377.eps

C-39

220EN_Catalogue.indb 39 25/11/2013 14:58:37


TOOLS

Ecodial

Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation


calculation in accordance with the IEC60364
international standard or national standards.

This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",


offers a new ergonomic and new features:
ppoperating mode that allows easy calculation in case
of installation with different type of sources
(parallel transformers, back-up generators…)
ppdiscrimination analysis associating curves checking
and discrimination tables
ppdirect access to protection settings including residual
current protections
ppeasy selection of alternate solutions or manual
selection of a product.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 40 25/11/2013 14:58:38


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Electrical diagrams
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1

Compact NSX100 to 630 DC


Fixed circuit breakers D-2
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers D-4
Motor mechanism D-6

Compact NSX630b to NSX1600 DC PV


Fixed switch-disconnectors D-8

Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV


Fixed and drawout devices D-10

Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Communication D-12

Fixed, electrically operated Masterpact NW DC - DC PV


Wiring of the COM option (with BCM ULP) and external power supply D-14

Withdrawable Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Wiring of the COM option (with CCM) and external power supply D-15

Additional characteristics E-1


Catalogue numbers and order form F-1

D-1

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:58:38


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
Fixed circuit breakers

Remote operation Remote operation


MN: undervoltage release
a (+) a (+) or
MX: shunt release
DB413346.eps

SDE 81 Motor mechanism (MT)


BPO BPF A4: opening order
A2: closing order
B4, A1: power supply to motor mechanism
82 84
L1: manual position (manu)
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct operation)
D2

C2

A4

A2

B4

B2

BPO: opening pushbutton


BPF: closing pushbutton

MN MX Communicating motor mechanism (MTc) (1)


B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
auto
0 I BSCM: breaker status and control module
or manu
A1
L1
D1

C1

a (-)
manu SDE

a (-)

Motor mechanism (MT)

NSX cord

a (220/240 V)
+ -

BSCM
HL

B4

auto 0 I
manu
A1

Communicating motor
mechanism (MTc) (1)

(1) NSX100-250 DC only.

D-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:58:39


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
Fixed circuit breakers

Indication contacts
DB403696.eps

Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open

102
104
134

124
42

32

22

12

82
84

92
94
44

34

24

14

WH
RD

YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1

WH
RD

GY
131
41

31

21

121

101
81

91
11

The diagram is shown with circuits Indication contacts


de-energised, all devices open, connected and OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
charged and relays in normal position. OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, ground fault,
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer. earth leakage)
SD: trip-indication contact
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact (rotary handle only)
CAO1: early-break contact (rotary handle only)

Colour code for auxiliary wiring


RD: red VT: violet
WH: white GY: grey
YE: yellow OR: orange
BK: black BL: blue
GN: green

D-3

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:58:39


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers

Remote operation

a (+)
a (+)

DB413077.eps
SDE 81

BPO BPF

82 84

C2
D2

B4
A4

A2

84
RD
A2 WH
BL

C2 OR

A4 OR

BL
D2

B4

B2
MN MX

auto
0 I
or manu

A1
L1
D1

C1

GN
WH

BK
A1
D1/C1

L1

a (-) manu a (-) SDE

Motor mechanism (MT)

NSX cord

a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL

BSCM
B4
B4 GN

auto
0 I
manu
OR A1
A4

Communicating motor
mechanism (MTc) (1)

(1) NSX100-250 DC only.

D-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:58:40


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers

Indication contacts Carriage switches


DB403698.eps

Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open Connected Disconnected


42

32

22

12

82
84

92
94
44

34

24

14
42 GN

82 GN

92 GN
44 RD

84 RD

94 RD
32 YE

22 YE

12 YE
34 VT

24 VT

14 VT

314
312

352
354
102
104
134

124
WH

GY

GY
RD

VT

VT
YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 WH CAO1 CE CD

YE

YE
GY
RD
131

121

101
BK 41

GY 31

GY 21

311

351
BK 81

BK 91
GY 11
41

31

21

81

91
11

Remote operation Indication contacts


MN: undervoltage release OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
or OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
MX: shunt release SDE: fault-trip indication contact
(short-circuit, overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
Motor mechanism (MT)
SD: trip-indication contact
A4: opening order
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact
A2: closing order
(rotary handle only)
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
CAO1: early-break contact
L1: manual position (manu) (rotary handle only)
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for automatic or remote
recharging)
BPO: opening pushbutton
BPF: closing pushbutton

Communicating motor mechanism (MTc)


B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
BSCM: breaker status and control module

D-5

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:58:41


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630
DC - DC PV
Motor mechanism

The diagram is shown with circuits Motor mechanism (MT) with automatic reset
de-energised, all devices open, connected and a (+)
charged and relays in normal position.

DB114666.eps
SDE 81
BPO BPF
After tripping initiated by the "Push to trip" button or
by the undervoltage (MN) release or the shunt (MX)
release, device reset can be automatic, remote or 82 84
manual.

A4

A2

B4

B2
Following tripping due to an electrical fault (with an
SDE contact), reset must be carried out manually.

Q
auto
0 I
manu

A1
L1
manu SDE
a (-)

Motor mechanism (MT) with remote reset


a (+)
DB114667.eps

SDE 81
BPO BPF Reset

82 84
A4

A2

B4

B2

Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1

manu SDE
a (-)

Motor mechanism (MT) with manual reset


a (+)
DB114668.eps

SDE 81
BPO BPF

82 84
A4

A2

B4

B2

Symbols
Q: circuit breaker
A4 : opening order
A2: closing order
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply Q
L1: manual position (manu) auto
0 I
manu
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct
operation)
A1
L1

BPO: opening pushbutton


BPF: closing pushbutton manu SDE
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, a (-)
overload, ground fault, earth leakage)

D-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:58:41


Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630
DC - DC PV
Motor mechanism

Communicating motor mechanism (MTc) (1)

NSX cord

DB114669.eps
a (220/240 V)

+ -
HL
BSCM

B4
Q
auto 0 I
manu

A1
a

Schematic representation of the communicating motor mechanism (MT).

RSU screen for the communicating motor mechanism (MTc)


DB115436R.eps

DB114670R.eps

RSU utility setup screen for the communicating


motor mechanism.

Single-line diagram of communicating motor mechanism


Opening, closing and reset orders are transmitted via the communication network.
The "Enable automatic reset" and "Enable reset even if SDE" parameters must be
set using the RSU software via the screen by clicking the blue text.

"Auto/manu" is a switch on the front of the motor mechanism.

Symbols
Q: circuit breaker
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
BSCM: breaker status and control module
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer.

(1) NSX100-250 only.

D-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:58:42


Electrical diagrams Compact NSX630b
to NSX1600 DC PV
Fixed switch-disconnectors

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,


all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.

Remote operation
MN : undervoltage release
DB128373.eps

or
MX : shunt release
AT BPO BPF
Motor-mechanism module (1)
A4 : electrical opening order
D2

C2

A2 : electrical closing order


B4
A4

A2

B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor

(1) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor).

CN1 a - 440/480 V
DB128380.eps

9 11

MN MX Motor-mechanism R
module A4 A2 B4

or

Motor-mechanism
module
D1

A1
C1

A1
CN2 a - 440/480 V

D-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:58:43


Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts

DB128377R.eps
MN/MX
D1/C1

D2/C2

OF3 OF2 OF1

31 21 11

32 22 12

34 24 14

B4 A4 A2 A1

D-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:58:43


Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW10 to NW40
DC - DC PV
Fixed and drawout devices

Diagrams are shown with circuits de-energised,


all devices open, connected and charged and relays in
the normal position.

Version C - DC Version D - DC Remote operation


DB404306.eps

DB404307.eps

DB105058.eps
Micrologic DC Micrologic DC

Version E - DC Version D - DC PV
DB416406.eps
DB404308.eps

Micrologic DC

Control unit Remote operation


Terminal block marking Com : E1-E6 communication SDE2 / Res SDE1 MN / MX2 MX1 XF PF MCH

E5 E6 184 / K2 84 D2 / C12 C2 A2 254 B2

E3 E4 182 82 C3 A3 252 B3

E1 E2 181 / K1 81 D1 / C11 C1 A1 251 B1

SDE2: fault-trip indication contact


or
Res: remote reset

SDE1: fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard)

MN: undervoltage release


or
MX2: shunt release

MX1: shunt release (standard or communicating)

XF: closing release (standard or communicating)

PF: ready-to-close contact

MCH: electric motor


Note:
When communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must
be connected even if the communication module is not installed.

D-10

220EN_Catalogue.indb 10 25/11/2013 14:58:46


Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW10 to NW40
DC - DC PV
Fixed and drawout devices

Indication contacts Chassis contacts


Db101409.eps

Indication contacts Chassis contacts


OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 CD3 CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT3 CT2 CT1

44 34 24 14 244 234 224 214 144 134 124 114 834 824 814 334 324 314 934 924 914

42 32 22 12 242 232 222 212 142 132 122 112 832 822 812 332 322 312 932 922 912

41 31 21 11 241 231 221 211 141 131 121 111 831 821 811 331 321 311 931 921 911
or or or or or or or or or or
EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 CE6 CE5 CE4 CE9 CE8 CE7

248 238 228 218 148 138 128 118 364 354 344 394 384 374

246 236 226 216 146 136 126 116 362 352 342 392 382 372

245 235 225 215 145 135 125 115 361 351 341 391 381 371

Indication contacts Chassis contacts


OF4 ON/OFF OF24 ON/OFF indication contacts CD3 Disconnected CE3 Connected CT3 Test position
OF3 indication contacts or Combined “connected-closed” indication CD2 position CE2 position CT2 contacts
OF2 EF24 contacts CD1 contacts CE1 contacts CT1
OF1
OF22 or or or
EF22
CE6 Connected CE9 Connected
OF21 or CE5 position CE8 position
EF21 CE4 contacts CE7 contacts

OF14 or or
EF14
CD6 Disconnected
OF13 or CD5 position
EF13 CD4 contacts

OF12 or
EF12

OF11 or
EF11
Legend:

Drawout device only.

XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.

Interconnected connections
(only one wire per connection point).
D-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:58:48


Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Communication

Connection of circuit breakers to the Modbus communication network


DB404484.eps

Ethernet

1 2

24 V c
Modbus 24 V c

1 External 24 V c power supply module (AD)


2 Ethernet gateway (EGX100)
3 Modbus Communication Interface Module
3 (TRV00210) with stacking accessory
(TRV00217)
4 ULP cable
5 FDM121 display (TRV00121)
6 Compact NSX DC cord (LV434200, LV434201,
LV434202)
7 Modbus CCM “chassis”
8 Breaker ULP cord (LV434195, LV434196,
LV434197)
9 Modbus BCM ULP “device”
4

6 6

Compact NSX160 DC Compact NSX250 DC Compact NSX160 DC


+ BSCM + BSCM

Masterpact NW DC

D-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:58:50


Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Communication
DB404310.eps

Ethernet
+ -
External power supply
24 V c EGX100
Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+
+ -

Modbus line
termination
(VW3A8306DRC)
24 V
0V

D0
D1

24 V
0V

D0
D1

24 V
0V

D0
D1
Modbus Communication Interface Module (Compact NSX DC)

The configuration is only possible


with CCM marked Schneider Electric
on the front face.

+ - + - + -
FDM121 FDM121
Network

A B A' B'
version > V2.0.2 version > V2.0.2
CCM
Breaker

A B A' B'
+ -

Breaker ULP Breaker ULP


cord cord

red black white blue red black white blue

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 V

0V
A / Tx - D0

A' / Rx - D0

24 V

0V
B / Tx + D1

B' / Rx+ D1

A / Tx - D0
B / Tx + D1
A' / Rx - D0
B' / Rx+ D1

BCM ULP customer terminal block

E5 E6
E3 E4
E1 E2

D-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:58:51


Electrical diagrams Fixed, electrically operated
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Wiring of the COM option (with BCM ULP)
and external power supply
To setup 4 wires and 2 wires, use the utility RSU.

Modbus RS 485 4-wire Modbus RS 485 2-wire Modbus RS 485 2-wire + ULP
DB404311.eps

A without ULP module A without ULP module B with ULP module

External power supply External power supply External power supply


- + 24 V c - + 24 V c - + 24 V c

+ - + - + -
EGX100 EGX100 EGX100
Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+

+ -
FDM121
version > V2.0.2

Breaker ULP
cord

red black white blue

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1

24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1

24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0

Customer terminal block Customer terminal block Customer terminal block

D-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:58:51


Electrical diagrams Withdrawable
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Wiring of the COM option (with CCM)
and external power supply
To setup 4 wires and 2 wires, use the utility RSU.

A Modbus RS 485 4-wire A Modbus RS 485 2-wire B Modbus RS 485 2-wire + ULP
DB404312.eps

without ULP module without ULP module with ULP module


External power supply External power supply External power supply
- +24 V c - +24 V c - +24 V c

+ - + - + -
EGX100 EGX100 EGX100
Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+

The B configuration is
only possible with CCM
marked Schneider Electric
on the front face.

+ - + - + - + -

Network
Network

FDM121
Network

A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’
version > V2.0.2
CCM CCM CCM

Breaker
Breaker

Breaker

A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’
+ - + - + -

Breaker ULP
cord

red black white blue

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1

24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1

B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1

Customer terminal block Customer terminal block Customer terminal block

D-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:58:52


TOOLS

schneider-electric.com

This international site allows you


to access all the Schneider Electric
Solution and Product information via :
ppcomprehensive descriptions
pprange data sheets
ppa download area
ppproduct selectors
pp...
You can also access the information
dedicated to your business and get
in touch with your Schneider Electric
country support.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:58:53


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Additional characteristics
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1

Compact NSX100 to 250 DC E-2


TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-2
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-5

Compact NSX400 to 630 DC E-8


MP1, MP2, MP3, tripping curves E-8

Current and energy limiting curves E-10


Compact NSX DC E-11

Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV E-12


TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-12

Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC E-14


Tripping curves E-14

Catalogue numbers and order form F-1

E-1

220EN_Catalogue.indb 1 25/11/2013 14:58:54


Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM16D TM25D
DB413316.eps

DB413317.eps

TM32D TM40D
DB413318.eps

DB413319.eps

E-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:58:55


Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM50D TM63D
DB413320.eps

DB413321.eps
TM63D : Im = 11 x In

TM80D TM100D
DB416611.eps

DB416610.e

E-3
Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics
TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM125D TM160D
DB416310.eps

DB416311.eps

TM200D TM250D
DB416312.eps

DB416313.eps

E-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:58:58


Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM16G TM25G
DB416352.eps

DB416353.eps
TM25G DC : Im 4.3 x In

TM40G TM63G
DB416354.eps

DB416355.eps

E-5

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:59:00


Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM80G TM100G
DB416583.eps

DB416584.eps
TM80G TM100G
Im = 3.1 x In Im = 4 x In

t < 10 ms t < 10 ms

TM125G TM160G
DB416586.eps
DB416585.eps

TM160G
TM125G
Im = 3.3 x In
Im = 2.7 x In

t < 10 ms t < 10 ms

E-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:59:01


Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM200G TM250G
DB416587.eps

DB416588.eps
TM200G TM250G
Im = 2.6 x In Im = 2.5 x In

t < 10 ms t < 10 ms

E-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:59:02


Additional Compact NSX400 to 630 DC
characteristics
MP1, MP2, MP3, tripping curves

MP1 for NSX400/630 MP2 for NSX400/630


DB416182.eps

DB416183.eps

MP3 for NSX630


DB416184.eps

E-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:59:03


E-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:59:03


Additional Current and energy limiting
characteristics
curves

The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude Ics = 100 % Icu
to let through a current, during a short-circuit, that is The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX DC range greatly reduces the
less than the prospective short-circuit current. forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance.
In particular, the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100 % of Icu.
The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
(Isc) the following steps:
DB416363.eps

Prospective b break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 % of Icu
Isc peak
b check that the device continues to function normally, that is:
v it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
v protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard
Prospective v suitability for isolation is not impaired.
current
Longer service life of electrical installations
Limited Isc Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
peak on installations.
Actual
current Thermal effects
Limited Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
Isc
Mechanical effects
(t) Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or busbars
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX DC being deformed or broken.
range is due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid Electromagnetic effects
natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc Fewer disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
voltages in-series with a very steep wave front).
Current and energy limiting curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a
function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no
protection devices were installed):
b the actual peak current (limited current)
b thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor
with a resistance of 1 Ω.
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NSX250L DC upstream ?
The answer is 30 kA peak (curve page E-11).

Maximum permissible cable stresses


The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm² and thermal stresses in A2s.
CSA 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 4 mm² 6 mm² 10 mm²
PVC Cu 2.97 x 104 8.26 x 104 2.12 x 105 4.76 x 105 1.32 x 106
Al 5.41 x 105
PRC Cu 4.10 x 104 1.39 x 105 2.92 x 105 6.56 x 105 1.82 x 106
Al 7.52 x 105
CSA 16 mm² 25 mm² 35 mm² 50 mm²
PVC Cu 3.4 x 106 8.26 x 106 1.62 x 107 3.31 x 107
Al 1.39 x 106 3.38 x 106 6.64 x 106 1.35 x 107
PRC Cu 4.69 x 106 1.39 x 107 2.23 x 107 4.56 x 107
Al 1.93 x 106 4.70 x 106 9.23 x 106 1.88 x 107

Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm² adequately protected by an NSX160F?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NSX160F (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6x105 A2s (curve page E-11).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.

E-10

220EN_Catalogue.indb 10 25/11/2013 14:59:03


Additional Current and energy limiting
characteristics
curves
Compact NSX DC

Current-limiting curves and thermal stress for L/R = 5 ms


Peak current U < 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U < 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P
500 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P

DB403733.eps
DB403731.eps

NSX400 DC
NSX630 DC

DC
DC NSX250 DC
DC NSX160 DC
DC NSX100 DC

Current-limiting curves and thermal stress for L/R = 15 ms


Peak current U < 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U < 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P
500 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P
DB403734.eps
DB403732.eps

DC

NSX400 DC
NSX630 DC
DC
DC
NSX250 DC
NSX100 DC
NSX160 DC

E-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:59:05


Additional Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV
characteristics
TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM80D TM125D
DB416348.eps

DB416349.eps

TM160D TM200D
DB416350.eps

DB416351.eps

E-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:59:06


Additional Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV
characteristics
TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves

TM250D TM320D/400D
DB415723.eps

DB415724.eps
IEC PV TM250D IEC PV TM320D/400D
Im = 5... 10 x In Im = 5... 10 x In

TM500D
DB415725.eps

IEC PV TM500D
Im = 5... 10 x In

E-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:59:07


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 500 V DC, L/R = 5 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104940.eps

DB104941.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104942.eps

E-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:59:08


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 750/900 V DC, L/R = 5 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104943.eps

DB104944.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104945.eps

E-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:59:09


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 500 V DC, L/R = 15 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104946.eps

DB104947.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104948.eps

E-16

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:59:09


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 750/900 V DC, L/R = 15 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104949.eps

DB104950.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104951.eps

E-17

220EN_Catalogue.indb 17 25/11/2013 14:59:10


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 500/750 V DC, L/R = 30 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104952.eps

DB104953.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104954.eps

E-18

220EN_Catalogue.indb 18 25/11/2013 14:59:10


Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 900 V DC, L/R = 30 ms

Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection


With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104955.eps

DB104956.eps

With 5000 - 11000 A sensors


DB104957.eps

E-19

220EN_Catalogue.indb 19 25/11/2013 14:59:11


TOOLS

Ecodial

Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation


calculation in accordance with the IEC60364
international standard or national standards.

This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",


offers a new ergonomic and new features:
ppoperating mode that allows easy calculation in case
of installation with different type of sources
(parallel transformers, back-up generators…)
ppdiscrimination analysis associating curves checking
and discrimination tables
ppdirect access to protection settings including residual
current protections
ppeasy selection of alternate solutions or manual
selection of a product.

220EN_Catalogue.indb 20 25/11/2013 14:59:12


Compact NSX DC - DC PV Catalogue numbers
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
and order form

Functions and characteristics A-1


Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1

Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC


Choice of device F-2
Parallel or series connection accessories F-3
Connection accessories F-4
Electrical auxiliaries F-6
Operation and locking/Interlocking F-8
Installation F-9
Plug-in/withdrawable accessories F-10

Spare parts: Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC F-11


Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Connection accessories F-13
Electrical auxiliaries F-15
Operation and locking/Interlocking F-17
Installation F-18

Compact NSX630b to 1600 NA DC PV fixed


electrically operated
Device based on separate components F-19

Spare parts: Masterpact NW DC - DC PV


Connection F-20
Remote operation F-21
Chassis locking and accessories F-22
Clusters F-23
Circuit breaker locking and accessories F-24
Mechanical interlocking for source changeover F-25
Indication contacts F-26
Instructions F-27

Spare parts: Masterpact NW DC - DC PV


Monitoring and control converter F-28

Order form
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC F-29
Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors F-30

Compact NSX630/1600 NA DC PV 4P, fixed version


Upside: front connection, 2 kit heatsink, phase separator are included F-31

Masterpact NW DC F-32

F-1

220E5000TDM_catalogue.indd 1 27/11/2013 16:10:15


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Choice of device

Compact NSX100/160 F/N/M/S 1P/2P


With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NSX100F AC/DC Compact NSX100F AC/DC
DB404343.eps

Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)


TM16D LV438562 LV438592
TM20D LV438563 LV438593
TM25D LV438564 LV438594
TM30D LV438565 LV438595
TM40D LV438566 LV438596
TM50D LV438567 LV438597
TM63D LV438568 LV438598
TM80D LV438569 LV438599
TM100D LV438570 LV438600
Compact NSX160F AC/DC Compact NSX160F AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM125D LV438669 LV438699
TM160D LV438670 LV438700
Compact NSX100N AC/DC Compact NSX100M AC/DC
DB404344.eps

Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 50 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 85 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)


TM16D LV438572 LV438602
TM20D LV438573 LV438603
TM25D LV438574 LV438604
TM30D LV438575 LV438605
TM40D LV438576 LV438606
TM50D LV438577 LV438607
TM63D LV438578 LV438608
TM80D LV438579 LV438609
TM100D LV438580 LV438610
Compact NSX160N AC/DC Compact NSX160M AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 50 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 85 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM125D LV438679 LV438709
TM160D LV438680 LV438710
Compact NSX100M AC/DC Compact NSX100S AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 85 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM16D LV438582 LV438612
TM20D LV438583 LV438613
TM25D LV438584 LV438614
TM30D LV438585 LV438615
TM40D LV438586 LV438616
TM50D LV438587 LV438617
TM63D LV438588 LV438618
TM80D LV438589 LV438619
TM100D LV438590 LV438620
Compact NSX160M AC/DC Compact NSX160S AC/DC
Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 85 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)
TM125D LV438689 LV438719
TM160D LV438690 LV438720

F-2

220EN_Catalogue.indb 2 25/11/2013 14:59:14


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Choice of device (cont.)
Parallel or series connection accessories
Compact NSX100/160/250 DC
Basic frame
3P 4P
DB115910.eps

Rating (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)


NSX100F DC LV438003 LV438008
NSX160F DC LV438103 LV438108
NSX250F DC LV438203 LV438208
(Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)
push
to
trip

NSX100S DC LV438018 LV438019


NSX160S DC LV438118 LV438119
NSX250S DC LV438218 LV438219
+ Trip unit
Standard protection: trip unit TM-D/DC
DB404345.eps

Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D LV429037 LV429057
TM25D LV429036 LV429056
TM32D LV429035 LV429055
TM40D LV429034 LV429054
TM50D LV429033 LV429053
TM63D LV429032 LV429052
TM80DC LV438029 LV438049
TM100DC LV438028 LV438048
TM125DC LV438136 LV438146
TM160DC LV438135 LV438145
TM200DC LV438246 LV438256
TM250DC LV438245 LV438255
Type G protection: trip unit TM-G
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16G LV429155 LV429165
TM25G LV429154 LV429164
TM40G LV429153 LV429163
TM63G LV429152 LV429162
TM80G LV430080 LV430092
TM100G LV430081 LV430093
TM125G LV430082 LV430094
TM160G LV430083 LV430095
TM200G LV430084 LV430096
TM250G LV430085 LV430097
Compact NSX400/630 DC with trip unit MP
3P 4P
DB404342.eps

Trip unit MP1


Compact NSX400F DC (36 kA) LV438403 LV438408
Compact NSX400S DC (100 kA) LV438418 LV438419
Compact NSX630F DC, 45 mm pitch (36 kA) LV438503 LV438508
Compact NSX630S DC, 45 mm pitch (100 kA) LV438518 LV438519
Trip unit MP2
Compact NSX400S DC (100 kA) LV438428 LV438429
Compact NSX630S DC, 45 mm pitch (100 kA) LV438528 LV438529
Trip unit MP3
Compact NSX630S DC, 45 mm pitch (100 kA) LV438538 LV438539

F-3

220EN_Catalogue.indb 3 25/11/2013 14:59:15


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Connection accessories

Special connection accessories for parallel or series connection NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Connection accessories
DB104731.eps

Connection accessories for parallel or series 1 connection plate LV438328 LV438338


connection of 2 poles (1) equipped with heat sink
+ 1 interphase barrier (2)
Connection plates
(3)
Connection plates for parallel connection of 3 poles 1 set of 2 connection LV438329
plates
(3) (3)
Connection plates for parallel connection of 4 poles
1P short terminal shields 1 pair LV438320
2P short terminal shields 2 pairs 2x LV438320
3P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set LV438325 LV438345
4P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set LV438326 LV438346
4P terminal shields for parallel connection of poles 1 set LV438327 LV438337
(2P/4P)
1 long terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base
DB112240.eps

3P LV429517
4P LV429518

Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Rear connections
2 short LV429235 LV432475
DB112225.eps

2 long LV429236 LV432476

Bare cable connectors


Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A Set of 2 LV429246
DB112226.eps

Set of 3 LV429242
Set of 4 LV429243
Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429255
Set of 3 LV429227
DB112725.eps

Set of 4 LV429228
120 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429247
Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
Clips for connectors Set of 10 LV429241
DB112726.eps
DB112227.eps

Aluminium connectors for 2 cables (4) 2 x (50 to 120 mm²) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429218 LV432479
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429219 LV432480
(4P)
DB112228.eps

Aluminium connectors (4) for 6 cables 6 x (1.5 to 35 mm²) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429248 LV432481
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429249 LV432482
(4P)
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
DB112724.eps

(1) Series connection: 2 poles = 1 connection plate.


3 poles = 2 connection plates.
4 poles = 3 connection plates.
Parallel connection: 2 poles = 2 connection plates.
3 poles = 1 set of 2 connection plates (29499).
2 x 2 poles = 4 connection plates.
(2) These connection accessories come with an interphase barrier.
(3) To be made by the customer.
(4) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

F-4

220EN_Catalogue.indb 4 25/11/2013 14:59:17


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Connection accessories (cont.)

Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Terminal extensions
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429250
DB104885.eps

Set of 3 LV429261 LV432484


Set of 4 LV429262 LV432485

Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429251


DB104884.eps

Set of 3 LV429263
Set of 4 LV429264

45° terminal extension (1) Set of 3 LV429223


DB112230.eps

Set of 4 LV429224

Edgewise terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429308 LV432486


DB112231.eps

Set of 4 LV429309 LV432487

Double-L terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429221


DB112234.eps

Set of 4 LV429222

Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch (1) 3P LV431563


DB112235.eps

4P LV431564

One-piece spreader from 35 to 45 mm pitch 3P LV431060


DB112236.eps

4P LV431061
Front alignment base (for one-piece spreader) 3P/4P LV431064

Crimp lugs for copper cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)


For cable 120 mm2 Set of 3 LV429252
DB404350.eps

Set of 4 LV429256
For cable 150 mm2 Set of 3 LV429253
Set of 4 LV429257
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429254
Set of 4 LV429258
For cable 240 mm2 Set of 3 LV432500
Set of 4 LV432501
For cable 300 mm2 Set of 3 LV432502
Set of 4 LV432503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
For cable 150 mm2 Set of 3 LV429504
DB404351.eps

Set of 4 LV429505
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429506
Set of 4 LV429507
For cable 240 mm2 Set of 3 LV432504
Set of 4 LV432505
For cable 300 mm2 Set of 3 LV432506
Set of 4 LV432507
Barriers
Interphase barriers Set of 6 LV429329 LV432570
DB115920.eps

Insulation screen
2 insulating screens for breaker (45 mm pitch) 3P LV429330
DB112242.eps

push
to
4P LV429331
trip

2 insulating screens for breaker (70 mm pitch) 3P LV432578


4P LV432579

(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

F-5

220EN_Catalogue.indb 5 25/11/2013 14:59:19


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Electrical auxiliaries

Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB404352.eps

OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452


SDE adapter, mandatory for trip unit LV429451

Voltage releases MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB404353.eps

48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405


110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631.eps

Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412


Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Composed of: MN 250 V DC LV429414
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 125 V DC LV429413
Delay unit 110-130 V 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 250 V DC LV429414
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 33682
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Voltage MT100/160 MT250 MT400-630
DB112265.eps

AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548 LV432639


110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540 LV432640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429434 LV431541 LV432641
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz LV429435 LV431542 LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543 LV432643
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544 LV432644
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545 LV432645
250 V LV429439 LV431546 LV432646
Operations counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter (1)
Motor mechanism module MTc 100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429441
DB112265.eps

MTc 250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV431549


+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.

F-6

220EN_Catalogue.indb 6 25/11/2013 14:59:22


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Electrical auxiliaries (cont.)

Communication accessories
ULP communication module
Modbus interface Modbus SL communication interface module TRV00210
DB111441.eps

ULP wiring accessories


NSX cord L = 0.35 m LV434200
DB111442.eps

NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201


NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
DB115621.eps

10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217

2 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC


DB111443.eps

(1)

RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m) 50965


DB115622.eps

5 RJ45 connectors female/female TRV00870


DB115623.eps

10 ULP line terminators TRV00880


DB111444.eps

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m TRV00803


DB111445.eps

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806


5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 2 m TRV00820
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 3 m TRV00830
1 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 5 m TRV00850
2 wires RS 485 insulated repeated TRV00211
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 ABL8RPS24030
DB112278.eps

(2)

External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV


DB112736.eps

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
(1) SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM,TMG.
(2) See Telemecanique catalogue.

F-7

220EN_Catalogue.indb 7 25/11/2013 14:59:23


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Operation and locking/Interlocking

Rotary handles NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Direct rotary handles
With black handle LV429337 LV432597
DB115918.eps

ON
I
With red handle on yellow front LV429339 LV432599
MCC conversion accessory LV429341 LV432606
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342 LV432602
O
OFF

Extended rotary handle


With black handle LV429338 LV432598
DB115917.eps

ON

With red handle on yellow front LV429340 LV432600


I

O
OFF ON
I
With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343 LV432603
OFF

Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV429345 LV432605
2 early-break contacts LV429346 LV429346
Locks NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
By removable device 29370 29370
DB115913.eps

push
to
trip

By fixed device for 3P/4P (open or close position) LV429371 LV432631


DB115916.eps

By fixed device for 3P/4P (open position only) LV429370 (1) LV432630 (1)
push
to
trip

Locking of the rotary handle


Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV429344 LV432604
DB115914.eps

ON
I
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 42888
O
OFF

Locking of the motor mechanism modules


Keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) LV429449 LV432649
DB115919.eps

2
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
/auto
I
1
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
manu O push
ON
OFF
push

Interlocking NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
DB111486.eps

With toggles LV429354 LV432614


DB111487.eps

With rotary handles LV429369 LV432621

Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles


Keylock kit (keylock not included) (2)
DB112268.eps

LV429344 LV432604
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950 41950
(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 42878

(1) Available February 2014.


(2) NSX100-250 DC only.

F-8

220EN_Catalogue.indb 8 25/11/2013 14:59:25


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Installation

Installation accessories NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Front-panel escutcheons
DB112269.eps

IP30 escutcheon for all control types LV429525 LV432557


IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV429526 LV432559

IP30
DB112737.eps

IP40 escutcheon for all control types LV429317 LV432558

IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover
DB112738.eps

1 toggle cover LV429319 LV432560

Lead-sealing accessories
DB115615.eps

Bag of accessories LV429375 LV429375

Din rail adapter


DB112739.eps

1 adapter LV429305

60 mm plate busbar adapter NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


DB111428.eps

3P 60 mm busbar adapter LV429372 LV432623


4P 60 mm busbar adapter LV429373 LV432624

F-9

220EN_Catalogue.indb 9 25/11/2013 14:59:25


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC
Plug-in/withdrawable accessories

Plug-in/withdrawable version accessories NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


Insulation accessories
DB117159.eps

1 connection adapter for plug-in base 3P LV429306 LV432584


4P LV429307 LV432585

Auxiliary connections
1 9-wire fixed connector (for base)
DB117160.eps

LV429273 LV429273
DB117161.eps

1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) LV429274 LV432523


DB116368.eps

1 support for 2 moving connectors LV429275 LV432525

9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)


DB115885.eps

LV429272 LV429272

Plug-in base accessories


DB117164.eps

2 long insulated right angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429276 LV432526


DB117165.eps

2 IP40 shutters for base LV429271 LV432521


DB117180.eps

Base 2P LV429265
3P LV429266 LV432516
DB117181.eps

Base 4P LV429267 LV432517


DB117182.eps

2 power connections 2/3/4P LV429268 LV432518


DB117183.eps

1 short terminal shields 2/3P LV429515 LV432591


DB117184.eps

1 short terminal shields 4P LV429516 LV432592


DB117171.eps

1 safety trip interlock 2/3/4P LV429270 LV432520

Installation and connection


Kit for Compact 3P LV429289 + LV422538 +
LV429282 + LV422532 +
LV429283 LV422533
4P LV429290 + LV422539 +
LV429282 + LV422532 +
LV429283 LV422533

F-10

220EN_Catalogue.indb 10 25/11/2013 14:59:27


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630 DC

Spare parts NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC


DB115633.eps

Additional toggle extension 32595


DB111430.eps

10 spare toggle extensions (only for Compact NSX250) LV429313


5 spare toggle extensions LV432553
DB115620.eps

Bag of screws LV429312 LV432552

12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC)


DB111431.eps

M6 for NSX100N/H/L LV429234


M8 for NSX160/250N/H/L LV430554

NS retrofit escutcheon
DB111432.eps

Small cut-out LV429528 LV432571


DB111433.eps

IP40 toggle escutcheon Compact NS type/small cut-out 29315 32556

1 set of 10 identification labels


DB111438.eps

LV429226 LV429226
DB111429.eps

1 base for extended rotary handle LV429502 LV432498


DB111434.eps

Torque limiting screws (set of 12) 3P/4P Compact NSX100-630 LV429513 LV432513
DB111436.eps

5 transparent covers for trip unit TM, MA, NA LV429481

F-11

220EN_Catalogue.indb 11 25/11/2013 14:59:28


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV

Compact NSX TM DC PV 4P Connection and insulation accessories mandatory


circuit breaker
Upstream connection (x2) Upstream terminal shields Downstream terminal shields
NSX80 LV438081 connection plate LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
DB415726.eps

NSX125 LV438126 with heatsink LV438328 LV438327 LV429518


NSX160 LV438161 LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
NSX200 LV438201 LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
NSX250 LV438451 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX320 LV438452 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX400 LV438453 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX500 LV438454 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594

Compact NSX NA DC PV 4P Connection and insulation accessories mandatory


switch disconnector
Upstream connection (x2) Upstream or interphase Downstream or interphase
terminal shields barrier terminal shields barrier
NSX100 LV438100 connection plate LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
DB415727.eps

NSX160 LV438160 with heatsink LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329


NSX200 LV438250 LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
(y 200 A at 40 °C)
NSX200 LV438250 connection plate LV438339 not available LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
(= 200 A at 55 °C) with heatsink (long)
NSX400 LV438300 connection plate LV438338 LV438337 LV432570 LV432594 LV432570
NSX500 LV438500 with heatsink LV438338 LV438337 LV432570 LV432594 LV432570

F-12

220EN_Catalogue.indb 12 25/11/2013 14:59:29


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Connection accessories

Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 NSX400-630


DC PV DC PV
Rear connections
2 short LV429235 LV432475
DB112225.eps

2 long LV429236 LV432476

Terminal shield
1 short terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base LV432592
DB416407.eps

4P LV429516

Bare cable connectors


Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A Set of 2 LV429246
DB112226.eps

Set of 3 LV429242
Set of 4 LV429243
Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429255
Set of 3 LV429227
DB112725.eps

Set of 4 LV429228
120 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429247
Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
Clips for connectors Set of 10 LV429241
DB112726.eps
DB112227.eps

Aluminium connectors for 2 cables (1) 2 x (50 to 120 mm²) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429218 LV432479
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429219 LV432480
(4P)
DB112228.eps

Aluminium connectors (1) for 6 cables 6 x (1.5 to 35 mm²) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429248 LV432481
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429249 LV432482
(4P)
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
DB112724.eps

(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

F-13

220EN_Catalogue.indb 13 25/11/2013 14:59:30


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Connection accessories (cont.)

Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 NSX400-630


DC PV DC PV
Terminal extensions
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429250
DB104885.eps

Set of 3 LV429261 LV432484


Set of 4 LV429262 LV432485

Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429251


DB104884.eps

Set of 3 LV429263
Set of 4 LV429264

45° terminal extension (1) Set of 3 LV429223


DB112230.eps

Set of 4 LV429224

Edgewise terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429308 LV432486


DB112231.eps

Set of 4 LV429309 LV432487

Double-L terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429221


DB112234.eps

Set of 4 LV429222

Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch (1) 3P LV431563


DB112235.eps

4P LV431564

Crimp lugs for copper cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)


For cable 120 mm2 Set of 3 LV429252
DB404350.eps

Set of 4 LV429256
For cable 150 mm2 Set of 3 LV429253
Set of 4 LV429257
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429254
Set of 4 LV429258
For cable 240 mm2 Set of 3 LV432500
Set of 4 LV432501
2
For cable 300 mm Set of 3 LV432502
Set of 4 LV432503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
For cable 150 mm2 Set of 3 LV429504
DB404351.eps

Set of 4 LV429505
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429506
Set of 4 LV429507
For cable 240 mm2 Set of 3 LV432504
Set of 4 LV432505
For cable 300 mm2 Set of 3 LV432506
Set of 4 LV432507
Barriers
Interphase barriers Set of 6 LV429329 LV432570
DB115920.eps

Insulation screen
2 insulating screens for breaker (45 mm pitch) 3P LV429330
DB112242.eps

push
to
4P LV429331
trip

2 insulating screens for breaker (70 mm pitch) 3P LV432578


4P LV432579

(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

Note: circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors must be in "off" position when fitting the mechanical or electrical accessories.

F-14

220EN_Catalogue.indb 14 25/11/2013 14:59:30


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Electrical auxiliaries

Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB404352.eps

OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452


SDE adapter, mandatory for trip unit LV429451

Voltage releases MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB404353.eps

48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405


110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631.eps

Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412


Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Composed of: MN 250 V DC LV429414
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 125 V DC LV429413
Delay unit 110-130 V 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Composed of: MN 250 V DC LV429414
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 33682
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Voltage MT100/160 MT250 MT400-630
DB112265.eps

AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548 LV432639


110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540 LV432640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429434 LV431541 LV432641
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz LV429435 LV431542 LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543 LV432643
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544 LV432644
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545 LV432645
250 V LV429439 LV431546 LV432646
Operations counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Motor mechanism module MTc 100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429441
DB112265.eps

MTc 250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV431549


MTc 400/630 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV432652
+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204

F-15

220EN_Catalogue.indb 15 25/11/2013 14:59:30


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Electrical auxiliaries (cont.)

Communication accessories (1)


ULP communication module
Modbus interface Modbus SL communication interface module TRV00210
DB111441.eps

ULP wiring accessories


NSX cord L = 0.35 m LV434200
DB111442.eps

NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201


NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
DB115621.eps

10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217

2 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC


DB111443.eps

(2)

RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m) 50965


DB115622.eps

5 RJ45 connectors female/female TRV00870


DB115623.eps

10 ULP line terminators TRV00880


DB111444.eps

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m TRV00803


DB111445.eps

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806


5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 2 m TRV00820
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 3 m TRV00830
1 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 5 m TRV00850
2 wires RS 485 insulated repeated TRV00211
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 ABL8RPS24030
DB112278.eps

External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV


DB112736.eps

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
(1) NSX80-250 DC PV TM/NA only.
(2) SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM,TMG.

F-16

220EN_Catalogue.indb 16 25/11/2013 14:59:31


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Operation and locking/Interlocking

Rotary handles NSX100-250 NSX400-630


DC PV DC PV
Direct rotary handles
With black handle LV429337 LV432597
DB115918.eps

ON
I
With red handle on yellow front LV429339 LV432599
MCC conversion accessory LV429341 LV432606
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342 LV432602
O
OFF

Extended rotary handle


With black handle LV429338 LV432598
DB115917.eps

ON

With red handle on yellow front LV429340 LV432600


I

O
OFF ON
I
With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343 LV432603
OFF

Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV429345 LV432605
2 early-break contacts LV429346 LV429346
Locks NSX100-250 NSX400-630
DC PV DC PV
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
By removable device 29370 29370
DB115913.eps

push
to
trip

By fixed device (open or close position) LV429371 LV432631


DB115916.eps

By fixed device (open position only) LV429370 (1) LV432630 (1)


push
to
trip

Locking of the rotary handle


Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV429344 LV432604
DB115914.eps

ON
I
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 42888
O
OFF

Locking of the motor mechanism modules


Keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) LV429449 LV432649
DB115919.eps

2
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
/auto
I
1
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
manu O push
ON
OFF
push

Interlocking NSX100-250 NSX400-630


DC PV DC PV
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles
Keylock kit (keylock not included) (2)
DB112268.eps

LV429344 LV432604
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950 41950
(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 42878

(1) Available February 2014.


(2) NSX100-250 DC PV only.

F-17

220EN_Catalogue.indb 17 25/11/2013 14:59:31


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Installation

Installation accessories NSX100-250 NSX400-630


DC PV DC PV
Front-panel escutcheons
DB112269.eps

IP30 escutcheon for all control types LV429525 LV432557


IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV429526 LV432559

IP30
DB112737.eps

IP40 escutcheon for all control types LV429317 LV432558

IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover
DB112738.eps

1 toggle cover LV429319 LV432560

Lead-sealing accessories
DB115615.eps

Bag of accessories LV429375 LV429375

Din rail adapter


DB112739.eps

1 adapter LV429305

F-18

220EN_Catalogue.indb 18 25/11/2013 14:59:31


Catalogue numbers Compact NSX630b to 1600 NA
DC PV fixed electrically operated
Device based on separate components

Molded case switch-disconnector


Complete device (basic frame + front connections)
Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX630b NA DC PV 630 A 4P LV438969
DB416408.eps

Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX800 NA DC PV 800 A 4P LV438970


Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX1000 NA DC PV 1000 A 4P LV438971
Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX1250 NA DC PV 1250 A 4P LV438972
Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX1600 NA DC PV 1500 A 4P LV438973

Basic Frame
Compact NSX type NA
DB416414.eps

4P
NSX630b NA DC PV LV453421
NSX800 NA DC PV LV453423
NSX1000 NA DC PV LV453425
NSX1250 NA DC PV LV453427
NSX1600 NA DC PV LV453429
I ON
push
OOFF
push

Note: the characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified
d
discharge

O OFF

separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.

Connections for switch-disconnectors


Front connection
4P
DB416412.eps
DB416415.eps

630-1000 A - NA Top 33608


Bottom 33609
1250 A - NA Top 33610
630-1000 A - L Bottom 33611
DB416413.eps

1600 A - NA Top 33612


DB415193.eps

Bottom 33613
Heatsink (mandatory 2 x) Top 2 x LV438966

Rear connection
DB416416.eps

Vertical NA Bottom 33615


Horizontal NA Bottom 33617

Communication options
For fixed devices Electrically operated
DB416589.eps

Modbus COM 33708


Eco Modbus COM module 33709

Electrical auxiliaries
Indication contacts
6 A - 240 V Low level
DB128428.eps

OF, ON/OFF indication contacts 33108 33109


Up to 3 OF can be connected.
Instantaneous voltage releases
MX MN
DB128429.eps

Delay unit R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)


12 V DC 33658
24/30 V DC 33659 33668
48/60 V DC 33660 33669 48/60 V DC 33680
100/130 V DC 33661 33670 100/130 V DC 33684 33681
200/250 V DC 33662 33671 200/250 V DC 33685 33682
380/480 V DC 33683
Motor mechanism module
DC 50/60 Hz
U Standard Communicating
DB401828.eps

24/30 V 33690 33697


48/60 V 33691 33698
100/130 V 33692 33699
200/250 V 33693 33700
Note: to order a complete device, order:
b a basic frame switch disconnector
b connections
b accessories (for the device, the connection) and communication option as required.

F-19

220EN_Catalogue.indb 19 25/11/2013 14:59:34


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Connection

Connection
C or D type E type
Fixed or drawout circuit breakers or switches
Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)
1000/2000 A Vertical or horizontal 47966 47967
DB404366.eps

Top or bottom

4000 A Vertical or horizontal 47968 47969


Top or bottom
DB413008.eps

Vertical mounting
Connection accessories
Additional support brackets for mounting on a backplate
For fixed rear-connected circuit breaker (2 parts) 47829
DB404369.eps

F-20

220EN_Catalogue.indb 20 25/11/2013 14:59:35


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Remote operation

Remote operation
Gear motor
MCH (1 part)
DB404410.eps

AC 50/60 Hz 48 V 47889
100/130 V 47893
200/240 V 47894
250/277 V 47895
380/415 V 47896
440/480 V 47897
DC 24/30 V 47888
48/60 V 47889
100/125 V 47890
DB404322.eps

200/250 V 47891
Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849
DB416231.eps

Fixed. Drawout. Installation manual 47951


Closing and opening release (XF or MX)
Standard coil (1 part)
DB416240.eps

AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC 33658
DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33659
48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33660
100/130 V AC/DC 33661
200/250 V AC/DC 33662
277 V AC 33663
380/480 V AC 33664
Communicating coil (1 part)
AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC 33032
DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33033
48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33034
100/130 V AC/DC 33035
200/250 V AC/DC 33036
277 V AC 33037
DB404322.eps

380/480 V AC 33038
Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849
DB416231.eps

Fixed. Drawout. Installation manual 47951


Undervoltage release MN
Undervoltage release (1 part)
DB416240.eps

AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33668


DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33669
100/130 V AC/DC 33670
200/250 V AC/DC 33671
380/480 V AC 33673
Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849
DB404322.eps
DB416231.eps

Fixed. Drawout. Installation manual 47951


MN delay unit
MN delay unit (1 part)
DB404320.eps

R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)
AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 V AC/DC 33680
DC 100/130 V AC/DC 33684 33681
200/250 V AC/DC 33685 33682
380/480 V AC/DC 33683
Installation manual 47951

F-21

220EN_Catalogue.indb 21 25/11/2013 14:59:37


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Chassis locking and accessories

Chassis locking
“Disconnected” position locking / 1 part
By padlocks
DB404325.eps

VCPO Standard
By Profalux keylocks
Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64934
2 locks 1 key + adaptation kit 64935
2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 64936
1 keylock Profalux identical key not identified combination 33173
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified 215470 combination 33174
identical key identified 215471 combination 33175
By Ronis keylocks
Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64937
2 locks 1 key + adaptation kit 64938
2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 64939
1 keylock Ronis identical key not identified combination 33189
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified EL24135 combination 33190
identical key identified EL24153 combination 33191
identical key identified EL24315 combination 33192
Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis 48564
(without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk 48565
adaptation kit Castell 48566
Installation manual 47952
Door interlock / 1 part
Right and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG) 47914
DB404326.eps

Installation manual 47952


Racking interlock
5 parts 64940
DB404327.eps

Installation manual 47952


Breaker mismatch protection / 1 part
Breaker mismatch protection (VDC) 33767
DB404329.eps

Installation manual 47952


Chassis accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 part
800/4000 A 3P 64942
DB404331.eps

4P 48596
4000b/6300 A 3P 48597
4P 48598

Safety shutters + locking block / 1 part


800/4000 A 3P 48721
DB404332.eps

4P 48723
4000b/6300 A 3P 48722
4P 48724
Installation manual 47952
Shutter locking block (for replacement) / 1 part
2 parts for 800/4000 A 48591
DB404333.eps

Installation manual 47952


Earthing kit for chassis
3P 4P
Types for N1/H1/NA/HA
48433 48434
Note: the installation manual is enclosed.

F-22

220EN_Catalogue.indb 22 25/11/2013 14:59:38


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Clusters

Clusters
1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) (part 1) 64906
DB403280.eps

Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models


Chassis rating (A) Masterpact NW 3P Masterpact NW 4P
N1 H1/H2 H3 L1 N1 H1/H2 H3 L1
250 12 (H1)
630 6 12 24 8 16 32
800 6 12 24 8 16 32
1000 6 12 24 8 16 32
1250 6 12 24 8 16 32
1600 12 12 24 16 16 32
2000 24 24 42 32 32 56
2500 24 24 32 32
3200 36 36 48 48
4000 42 42 56 56
4000b 72 96
5000 72 96
6300 72 96
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.

Racking handle
Racking handle 47944
DB403281.eps

DC rear connection
Serial connection kit
For NW10/20 DC 48642
DB416603.eps

For NW40 DC 48643


DB105110.eps

F-23

220EN_Catalogue.indb 23 25/11/2013 14:59:39


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Circuit breaker locking and accessories

Circuit breaker locking


Pushbutton locking device / 1 part
By padlocks 48536
DB404337.eps

Installation manual 47951


OFF position locking / 1 part
By padlocks
DB404411.eps

48539
By Profalux keylocks
Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64928
2 locks 1 key + adaptation kit 64929
2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 64930
1 keylock Profalux identical key not identified combination 33173
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified 215470 combination 33174
identical key identified 215471 combination 33175
By Ronis keylocks
Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64931
2 locks 1 key + adaptation kit 64932
2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 64933
1 keylock Ronis identical key not identified combination 33189
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified EL24135 combination 33190
identical key identified EL24153 combination 33191
identical key identified EL24315 combination 33192
Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis 64925
(without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk 64927
adaptation kit Castell 64926
Installation manual 47951
Other circuit breaker accessories
Mechanical operation counter / 1 part
Operation counter CDM 48535
DB125617.eps

Installation manual 47951


Escutcheon and accessories / 1 part
Fixed Drawout
DB403097.eps

DB403098.eps

DB403099.eps

Escutcheon 48601 48603


Transparent cover (IP 54) 48604
Escutcheon blanking plate 48605 48605

Escutcheon Cover
Blanking plate Installation manual 47951
Spring charging handle / 1 part
Spring charging handle 47940
DB404413.eps

Installation manual 47951

Arc chute for Masterpact NW / 1 part


C type D type E type
DB404414.eps

Type NW DC 2 x 47934 3 x 47934 4 x 47934

Installation manual 47951

F-24

220EN_Catalogue.indb 24 25/11/2013 14:59:40


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Mechanical interlocking
for source changeover
Cable-type door interlock
1 complete assembly for Masterpact NW fixed or drawout device 48614
Note: the installation manual is enclosed.

F-25

220EN_Catalogue.indb 25 25/11/2013 14:59:40


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Indication contacts

Indication contacts
ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 12 parts
1 additional block of 4 contacts 64922
DB404321.eps

Wiring For fixed circuit breaker 47074


For drawout circuit breaker 47849

Installation manual 47951


“Fault trip” indication contacts (SDE) / 1 part
Changeover contact (SDE) 6 A - 240 V 47915
DB404323.eps

Low-level 47916
Wiring For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849

Installation manual 47951


“Ready to close” contact (1 max.) / 1 part
PF
DB404415.eps

1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 47080


1 low-level changeover contact 47081
Wiring For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849
Installation manual 47951
“Connected, disconnected, test position” indication contact (carriage switches) / 1 part
Changeover contacts 6 A - 240 V 33170
DB404324.eps

CE, CD, CT Low-level 33171

Installation manual 47952


Set of additional actuaters for carriage switches / 1 set
1 set 48560

Combined closed / connected contacts for use with 1 auxiliary contact / 1 part
1 contact (5 A - 240 V) 48477
DB404322.eps

or 1 low-level contact 48478

Installation manual 47952


Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 part
BPFE
DB404319.eps

1 pushbutton 48534

Installation manual 47951


Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone
3 wire terminal (1 part) 47849
6 wire terminal (1 part) 47850
Jumpers (10 parts) 47900

F-26

220EN_Catalogue.indb 26 25/11/2013 14:59:41


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Instructions

Instructions
Chassis accessories 47952
Circuit breaker accessories 47951
Fixed and drawout circuit breaker 47950
User manual NW DC (French) 64923
NW DC (English) 64924
Modbus communication notice for manual 33088

F-27

220EN_Catalogue.indb 27 25/11/2013 14:59:41


Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Monitoring and control converter

Monitoring and control


ULP display module
Switchboard front display module FDM121 TRV00121
DB111440.eps

FDM mounting accessory (diameter 22 mm) TRV00128

ULP wiring accessories


Breaker ULP cord L = 0.35 m LV434195
DB127985.eps

Breaker ULP cord L = 1.3 m LV434196


Breaker ULP cord L = 3 m LV434197

(1)
10 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC
DB111443.eps

5 RJ45 connectors female/female TRV00870


DB111444 DB115623.eps

10 ULP line terminators TRV00880

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m TRV00803


DB111445.eps

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806


5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 2 m TRV00820
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 3 m TRV00830
1 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 5 m TRV00850
Converter
RS485/Ethernet EGX100MG/EGX300 (*)
(1) See Telemecanique catalogue.
(*) Consult us.

F-28

220EN_Catalogue.indb 28 25/11/2013 14:59:42


Order form Order form: Compact
NSX100 DC to NSX630 DC

Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication auxiliaries


square boxes information in the rectangles Auxiliary contact OF SD SDE Standard Low level
Circuit breaker Quantity SDE adapter (TM trip unit)
Compact type NSX100/160/250 Remote operation
NSX400/630 Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Rating A Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
Circuit breaker F, N, M, S MN AC DC V
Number of poles 1 or 2 Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
Circuit breaker DC Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
Number of poles 3 or 4 Rotary handles
Number of poles tripped 3d or 4d Direct Black Red on yellow front
Fixed device Front conn. Long rear conn. MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Short rear conn. Extended Black Red on yellow front
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Thermal-magnetic trip unit Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Thermal-magnetic TMD rating (16…63 A) Wiring accessory for early-make switches
NSX100 to 250 TMG rating (16…250 A) Locking
TMDC rating (80…250 A) Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
Magnetic only MP1 (NSX400/630) Fixed Open
NSX400/630 MP2 (NSX400/630) Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
MP3 (NSX630) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Special connection accessories for parallel or Motor mechanism Keylock adapter + Keylock Ronis (special) NSX100/250
series connection Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
Series 2 poles (1 connection plate) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
connection 3 poles (2 connection plates) Interlocking
4 poles (3 connection plates) Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
Parallel 2 poles (2 connection plates) By key (2 Keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
connection 3 poles (NSX100 to 250, For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
1 set of 2 connection plates) Installation accessories
2 x 2 poles (4 connection plates) Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
Special terminal shields for parallel or series Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
connection Toggle cover
1P short 1 pair Sealing accessories
2P short 2 x 1 pair (1P) DIN rail adapter NSX100/250
3P short for series connection of poles 1 set Plug-in / Drawout configuration accessories
4P short for series connection of poles 1 set Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fixed part with 9 wires (for base)
4P short for parallel connection 1 set 1 auto. conn. moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker )
of poles (2P/4P) 1 support for 3 automatic connector moving parts
Connection 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)
NSX100/250 Steel 1.5v to 95v (< 160 A) Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 3 Set of 4
connectors Aluminium 25v to 95v (< 250 A) 2 IP4 shutters for base
Aluminium 120v to 185v (< 250 A) Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle
NSX400/630 1 cable 35v to 300v Locking kit (keylock not included)
connectors 2 cables 35v to 240v 2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
Voltage measurement For bare cable NSX100/250 Parts of plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
input connector y 185v Set of 2 power connections Standard
For bare cable NSX400/630 Safety trip for advanced opening
connector
For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
Right-angle terminal extensions Fixed part
Straight extensions NSX100/250 Communication (1)
Edgewise extensions NSX400/630 NSX Cord L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 1.3 m
Double L terminal extension 3P 4P NSX Cord U > 480 V AC L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 3 m
Spreader from 35 to 45 mm 3P 4P BSCM
One piece spreader Communicating motor mechanism 220-240 V
Front alignment Switchboard front display module FDM121
Cu cable lugs NSX100/250 120v 150v 185v FDM mounting accessory
NSX400/630 240v 300v Modbus interface
Al cable lugs NSX100/250 150v 185v Stacking accessory
NSX400/630 240v 300v ULP line termination
Insulation screen 45 mm 3P 4P RJ45 connectors female/female Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
70 mm 3P 4P L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
Interphase barriers Set of 6 Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=1m L=2m
Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=3m L=5m
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.

F-29

220EN_Catalogue.indb 29 25/11/2013 14:59:42


Order form Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication auxiliaries
square boxes information in the rectangles Auxiliary contact OF SD SDE Standard Low level
Circuit breaker Quantity SDE adapter (TM trip unit)
Compact type NSX80 TM DC PV Remote operation
NSX125 TM DC PV Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
NSX160 TM DC PV Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
NSX200 TM DC PV MN AC DC V
NSX250 TM DC PV Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
NSX320 TM DC PV Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
NSX400 TM DC PV Rotary handles
NSX500 TM DC PV Direct Black Red on yellow front
Special connection and insulation accessories MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
for circuit breakers (mandatory) Extended Black Red on yellow front
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2) Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
special terminal shields Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Downstream standard long terminal shields Wiring accessory for early-make switches
or rear connections short Locking
long Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
+ short terminal shields
Fixed Open
Switch-disconnector Quantity
Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Compact type NSX100 NA DC PV
Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
NSX160 NA DC PV Motor mechanism Keylock adapter + Keylock Ronis (special) NSX100/250
NSX200 NA DC PV (160 A) Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
NSX200 NA DC PV (200 A) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
NSX400 NA DC PV
Interlocking
NSX500 NA DC PV Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
Special connection and insulation accessories By key (2 keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
for switch-disconnectors (mandatory) For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2)
y 200 A at 40 °C special terminal shields
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
or interphase barriers Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2) Toggle cover
= 200 A at 55 °C (long)
Sealing accessories
interphase barriers
DIN rail adapter NSX100/250
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2)
u 400 A Communication (1)
special terminal shields
NSX Cord L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 1.3 m
or interphase barriers NSX Cord U > 480 V AC L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 3 m
Downstream standard long terminal shields BSCM
or rear connections short Communicating motor mechanism 220-240 V
long Switchboard front display module FDM121
+ short terminal shields FDM mounting accessory
or interphase barriers Modbus interface
Stacking accessory
Connection
ULP line termination
NSX100/250 Steel 1.5v to 95v (< 160 A)
connectors RJ45 connectors female/female Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
Aluminium 25v to 95v (< 250 A)
L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
Aluminium 120v to 185v (< 250 A)
Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
NSX400/630 1 cable 35v to 300v
L=1m L=2m
connectors 2 cables 35v to 240v
Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
Voltage measurement For bare cable NSX100/250
L=3m L=5m
input connector y 185v
For bare cable NSX400/630 (1) NSX80-250 DC PV TM/NA only.
connector
Right-angle terminal extensions
Straight extensions NSX100/250
Edgewise extensions NSX400/630
Double L terminal extension 3P 4P
Spreader from 35 to 45 mm 3P 4P
Cu cable lugs NSX100/250 120v 150v 185v
NSX400/630 240v 300v
Al cable lugs NSX100/250 150v 185v
NSX400/630 240v 300v
Insulation screen 45 mm 3P 4P
70 mm 3P 4P
Interphase barriers Set of 6

F-30

220EN_Catalogue.indb 30 25/11/2013 14:59:43


Order form Compact NSX630/1600 NA
DC PV 4P, fixed version
Upside: front connection, 2 kit heatsink,
phase separator are included
Name of customer: ................................................................... Indication contacts
Adress for delivery: .................................................................. OF - ON/OFF indication contacts (maixmum 3)
Requested delivery date: ......................................................... 6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
Customer order no: .................................................................. Remote operation
To indicate your choices, Electrical operation Standard Communicating
Check the and enter the appropriate (NSX 630b/1600 DC PV) Power supply AC DC V
applicable square information in the Voltage releases MX AC DC V
boxes rectangles
MN AC DC V
Switch-disconnector Quantity
Rating A MN delay unit Adjustable Non-adjustable

Communication Locking
COM module Modbus For electrically VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking
operated devices (by transparent cover + padlocks)
Front Display Module (FDM121) Mounting accessory (NSX630b/1600 DC PV)
OFF position locking:
Breaker ULP Cord L = 0.35 m
VCPO - by padlocks
L = 1.3 m
VSPO - by keylocks:
L=3m
Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
AD - external power-supply module V
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
NSX630b/1600 DC PV connection
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
Horizontal rear connections Bottom
Vertical rear connections Bottom Accessories
Front connections Bottom CDM - mechanical operation counter
4 x 240° + bare cable connectors + shields Bottom CDP - escutcheon
Vertical-connection adapters Bottom CP - transparent cover for escutcheon
Cable-lug adapters Bottom OP - blanking plate for escutcheon
Long connection shields (1) Top Bottom
or interphase barriers Bottom
(1) Bottom long connection shield or Bottom interphase
barriers kit is mandatory.

F-31

220EN_Catalogue.indb 31 25/11/2013 14:59:43


Order form Order form: Masterpact NW DC

Name of customer: .................................................................... Indication contacts


Address for delivery: ................................................................. OF - ON/OFF indication contacts
.................................................................................................. Standard 4 OF 10 A/240 V AC and low level
Requested delivery date: .......................................................... Additional 1 block of 4 OF Max. 2 Qty
Customer order no.: .................................................................. EF - combined “connected/closed” contacts
To indicate your choices, check the applicable square boxes 1 EF 6 A/240 V AC Max. 8 Qty
and enter the appropriate information in the rectangles 1 EF low level Max. 8 Qty
SDE - “fault-trip” indication contact
Circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Qty Standard 1 SDE 6 A/240 V AC
Masterpact type NW10 Additional 1 SDE 6 A/240 V AC 1 SDE low level
NW20 Carriage switches Low level 6 A/240 V AC
NW40 CE - “connected” position Max. 3 Qty

Circuit breaker N, H CD - “disconnected” position Max. 3 Qty

Special PV switch- HADCD-PV (NW20 or CT - “test” position Max. 3 Qty


disconnectors NW40) AC - NW actuator for 6 CE - 3 CD - 0 CT additional carriage switches Qty
Switch-disconnector HA Remote operation
Sensor version 1250 to 2500 A Electrical operation MCH - gear motor V
2500 to 5400 A XF - closing voltage release V
5000 to 11000 A MX - opening voltage release V
Version C, D, E
PF - “ready to close” contact Low level
Type of equipment Fixed
6 A/240 V AC
Drawout chassis BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton
Communication Res - electrical reset option V
COM module Modbus Device Chassis RAR - automatic reset option
Front Display Module FDM121 Mounting Remote tripping MN - undervoltage release V
Breaker ULP Cord L = 0.35 accessory
R - delay unit (non-adjustable)
L = 1.3 Rr - adjustable delay unit
L=3m 2e MX - shunt release V
Connection Locking
Vertical Standard version Top Bottom VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking (by transparent cover + padlocks)
Horizontal Vertical connection is standard however OFF position locking:
the connectors can be rotated on-site VCPO - by padlocks
conversion to horizontal connection
VSPO - by keylocks Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
(except on the NW40)
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
2 keylocks, different keys Profalux Ronis
Chassis locking in “disconnected” position:
VSPD - by keylocks Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
Kirk Castell
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
2 keylocks, different keys Profalux Ronis
Optional connected/disconnected/test position locking
VPEC - door interlock On right-hand side of chassis
On left-hand side of chassis
VPOC - racking interlock
IPA - cable-type door interlock
VDC - mismatch protection
VIVC - shutter position indication and locking
IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton for NW
DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal for NW
Accessories
VO - safety shutters on chassis
CDM - mechanical operation counter
CB - auxiliary terminal shield for chassis
CDP - escutcheon
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon
KMT - Grounding kit

F-32

220EN_Catalogue.indb 32 25/11/2013 14:59:43


220E0000.indd 3 25/11/2013 15:52:29
ART960272 © 2013 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved.

Schneider Electric Industries SAS


35, rue Joseph Monier As standards, specifications and designs change from
CS 30323 time to time, please ask for confirmation of the
92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex information given in this publication.
10-31-1247
France
Publication: Schneider Electric Industries SAS
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Photos: Schneider Electric This document has been
Capital social 896 313 776 € Publishing: Altavia St Etienne printed on ecological paper.
www.schneider-electric.com

LVPED208006EN 12-2013

220E0000.indd 4 25/11/2013 15:52:30

You might also like